JP6524142B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player.

  As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device, and variable display of a plurality of types of identification information when the game medium wins in a start winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area There is a pachinko gaming machine in which a game is played, a slot machine in which a predetermined bet number is set, and variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) is performed when a start operation is performed. Thus, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute variable display of identification information, when the display result of the variable display of identification information in the variable display portion becomes a predetermined display result, a predetermined gaming value (for example, a jackpot) Some are configured to give the player a transition to a state, etc.).

  As this type of game machine, for example, there is one as described in Patent Document 1.

JP, 2009-195432, A

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and capable of controlling in an advantageous state for the player, and capable of storing information on variable display not yet started as hold storage. Memory device, variable winning device capable of changing to a first state in which game media hardly enters or does not enter, and a second state in which game media is easier to enter than the first state, and a variable winning device in a second state And a predetermined effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect for notifying a second result indicating the possibility of becoming an advantageous state or a first result indicating whether or not And a predetermined effect limiting means for restricting the execution of the effect, wherein the effect mode of the predetermined effect includes the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the predetermined effect is executed according to the first effect mode. 2 in the production mode Ri between when executed, different ratio of either the first result and one of the results of the second result is informed, the number of pending memory stored in the hold memory means first when the first number 2 The predetermined effect of notifying the second result is executed when the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means is greater than the first number than when the predetermined effect of notifying the result is executed It is characterized in that when it is done, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is higher. Such a configuration can improve interest.
(Means B) Another gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player, wherein a first state in which game media hardly enters or does not enter, and A variable prize device capable of changing to a second state in which game media can easily enter than the first state, and a predetermined effect notifying whether the variable prize device is in the second state or the possibility of becoming an advantageous state The predetermined effect execution means to be executed and the predetermined effect restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect during the predetermined period when the variable display is not performed, the predetermined effect execution means has the first aspect, the first aspect According to a second aspect different from the second aspect, the predetermined effect can be performed. Such a configuration can improve interest.

(Means 1) The other gaming machine according to the present invention has an advantageous state (for example, bonus) advantageous to the player based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied in the game (for example, internally winning and winning a bonus). A gaming machine that can be controlled (for example, slot machine 1. It may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700 shown in the fourth embodiment), and benefits (for example, gold, silver, copper) different from the advantageous state The bonus granting means (for example, the part executing steps S2609 to S2611 in the sub CPU 91a) and the game related information related to the game (for example, the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, earned coins, etc.) Game-related information storage means (for example, acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b) for storing the game history of Game related information output unit (for example, a portion of the sub CPU 91a that executes step S2707) for outputting information (for example, the game history itself or information such as a two-dimensional code including the game history); Setting means for setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information stored in the game-related information storage means based on the operation of the player (for example, a portion that executes step S2308 in the sub CPU 91a); The privilege granting means grants a privilege when setting for outputting information capable of specifying game-related information is performed by the setting means, and setting for outputting information capable of specifying game-related information is performed. The privilege is not given when the game is not being played (for example, the sub CPU 91a performs steps S2608A to S2608C, S). By executing 609, as shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b), the time when the password is input and the game is started is compared with the time when the "Easy Start" is selected and the game is started. If, for example, the sub CPU 91a shifts to the processes of steps S2608A to S2608C and S2609 only when Y is in step S2601, is the password input? Or coin may be awarded only when "Easy start" is selected and it shifts to the specific effect mode, and there is no password input and coin is awarded if "Easy start" is not selected. There is no advantage result suggestion result (for example, "o" or "x") indicating whether it is controlled to an advantage state as a presentation result In the case of informing the advantage possibility suggestion result and in the case of informing the privilege provision suggestion result of a merit assignment suggestion result (for example, a demonstration result of "coin") which suggests that a benefit is given or a benefit is given, The suggestion effect executing means (for example, the sub CPU 91a executes the predetermined effect of step S4010 to execute the indication effect to be notified after the effect of the common mode common to the above is shown in FIG. 35, FIG. 37, FIG. 38) The system further comprises a predetermined effect in an aspect, the privilege giving means is capable of giving a plurality of types of benefits, and the suggestion effect executing means has a privilege giving suggestion result in a mode capable of recognizing the type of the provided benefit. Indicative, indicating that it is not controlled to an advantageous suggestion result or an advantageous state which suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state as an advantageous possibility suggestive result. With the non-beneficial suggestions result is possible notification to, characterized in that the non-beneficial suggestions result switch to privilege granting suggested results can be broadcast. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest for giving a benefit to the player who is setting for outputting the game related information.
Note that "providing benefits in an advantageous manner" may be such that benefits are awarded at a higher rate when settings for outputting information that can specify game-related information are made. The privilege can be granted only when the setting for outputting information that can identify the game related information is made possible, and when the setting for outputting the information that can specify the game related information is not performed, the benefit is given. It may be something which is not given at all.

(Means 2) The gaming system according to the present invention is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, bonus) advantageous to the player based on the fact that a specific condition is established in the game (for example, internally winning and winning a bonus). Possible gaming machines (for example, slot machine 1. It may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700 shown in the fourth embodiment) and gaming related information related to the game (for example, total number of games, number of BBs, etc.) Information capable of specifying the game history such as the number of RBs and earned coins (for example, the game history itself may be received or information such as a two-dimensional code including the game history may be received) and predetermined processing is performed based on the information A gaming system (eg, gaming system 1001) including a management device (eg, management server 1200) for executing A privilege giving means (for example, a portion for executing steps S2609 to S2611 in the sub CPU 91a) for giving a benefit (for example, a coin of gold, silver, copper) different from the state Information storage means (for example, an acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b), game related information output means (for example, a portion for executing step S2707 in the sub CPU 91a) for outputting information capable of specifying game related information, and a player And setting means for setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information stored in the game-related information storage means based on the operation of (for example, a portion for executing step S2308 in the sub CPU 91a) The giving means is for outputting information capable of specifying the game related information by the setting means. When the setting is performed, a privilege is given, and when the setting for outputting information that can specify the game related information is not set, the privilege is not given (for example, the sub CPU 91a performs steps S2608A to S2608C, S2609). As shown in FIGS. 12 (a) and 12 (b) by executing, the direction when the password is input and the game is started is compared with the time when the “easy start” is selected and the game is started. For example, the sub CPU 91a may enter a password by entering processing of steps S2608A to S2608C and S2609 only when Y in step S2601. Coins may be awarded only when “Easy Start” is selected and the game is shifted to a specific effect mode. If no password is entered and "Easy Start" is not selected, coins will not be awarded. ), An advantage possibility suggestion result (for example, an “o” or “x” presentation result) indicating whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state as a presentation result or a privilege giving suggestion result indicating that a privilege is given (For example, "indication result of" coin ") Performs an indication effect to notify after performing an effect in a common mode common to the case of informing the advantage possibility indication result and the case of informing the privilege giving indication result In addition, the bonus provision unit further includes a suggestion effect execution unit (for example, the sub CPU 91a executes the predetermined effect in the mode illustrated in FIG. 35, FIG. 37, and FIG. 38 by executing the predetermined effect in step S4010). A plurality of types of benefits can be provided, and the suggestion effect execution means can notify the result of awarding a benefit in a manner that can recognize the type of the given benefit, and is advantageous in the suggestion effect It is possible to inform advantage suggestion result that is controlled to advantage state as a sexual suggestion result or non-advantage suggestion result that is not controlled to advantage state, and switch from non-advantage suggestion result to benefit provision suggestion result It can be notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest for giving a benefit to the player who is setting for outputting the game related information.
Note that "providing benefits in an advantageous manner" may be such that benefits are awarded at a higher rate when settings for outputting information that can specify game-related information are made. The privilege can be granted only when the setting for outputting information that can identify the game related information is made possible, and when the setting for outputting the information that can specify the game related information is not performed, the benefit is given. It may be something which is not given at all.

(Means 3) In the gaming system of means 2, the privilege imparting means imparts a predetermined exchange value (eg, gold, silver, copper coin) as a benefit (eg, the sub CPU 91a executes step S2609, Gold, silver, copper coins), the management device, the advantage value giving means (for example, item A, item B) by giving a predetermined exchange value is consumed (for example, 47 may be configured to include the item A and the item B) in the management server 1200. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest concerning the provision of a predetermined exchange value as a benefit to the player who is setting for outputting the game related information.

(Means 4) In the gaming machine or gaming system of any one of means 1 to 3, the suggestion effect performing means is an advantage result indicating that the suggestion effect is controlled to an advantage state as an advantage possibility suggestion result. It is possible to notify (for example, effect result of “o”) or non-advantage result (for example, effect result of “x”) indicating not to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the sub CPU 91a is the predetermined effect of step S4010 In the suggested effect, when settings for outputting information that can specify game-related information are made by the setting means, the player can notify "o" or "x" as the effect result. After the start of the execution of the option display effect that displays a plurality of option display corresponding to each effect result, the non-advantage result is cut into a benefit imparting suggestion result Instead, the notification can be made (for example, by executing the predetermined effect processing according to the flow shown in FIG. 33, the sub CPU 91a temporarily shows that the effect result of “x” will be once as shown in FIG. 35 (3) From this, as shown in FIG. 35 (4), the effect of switching from the effect result of “x” to the effect result of “coin” can be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest for giving a privilege to the player who is setting for outputting the game related information by making the notification aspect of the suggested effect have a surprising property. Can.

(Means 5) In the gaming machine or gaming system according to any one of Measures 1 to 3, the suggestion effect performing means is an advantage result indicating that the suggestion effect is controlled to an advantage state as an advantage possibility suggestion result. While it is possible to notify (for example, effect result of “o”) or non-advantage result (for example, effect result of “x”) indicating not to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the sub CPU 91a is a predetermined in step S4010 By executing the effect, “o” or “x” can be notified as the effect result), and after the execution of the option display effect displaying a plurality of option displays corresponding to each effect result is started in the suggested effect , And any of the rendering results can be notified (for example, the sub CPU 91a executes the predetermined rendering in step S4010, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, after displaying a roulette picture including a plurality of options such as “o”, “x”, and “coin” and starting a predetermined effect, any of the effect results can be notified When there is a setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information by the setting means, there is no setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information by the setting means. After the option display corresponding to the non-advantage result displayed in is replaced with the option display corresponding to the benefit provision suggestion result and displayed and the execution of the option display effect is started, the benefit provision suggestion result can be notified (for example, When the sub CPU 91a executes a predetermined effect process according to the flow shown in FIG. 36, as shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, a place where a password is input and a game is started Start the effect that the ball spins the roulette in a manner that includes more options for “coin” than when “easy start” is selected and the game is started, “coin” To notify of the rendering result of According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest for giving a privilege to the player who is setting for outputting the game related information by making the notification aspect of the suggested effect have a surprising property. Can.

(Means 6) In another aspect of the gaming system according to the present invention, it is possible for a player to play a predetermined game, and a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1) that outputs information specifying a gaming history, A gaming system (for example, the gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, the management device 1200) that acquires and manages information output from the game machine, and a plurality of predetermined advantages (for example, item A) Or the right granting means for giving the right (for example, coin) for giving any of the items B) according to the game history (for example, the part performing the processing of S2604 to S2607 of FIG. 28 and performing the processing of S2611) And an advantageous value determination unit that determines a predetermined advantageous value to be granted based on the right granted by the right granting unit (for example, S3703 or S37 in FIG. 47). 3), and the advantageous value determination means sets the specific effect set by the player as the effect to be executed by the gaming machine, when the specific effect is set. It is determined that the predetermined advantageous value of the type related to the specific effect is given at a high ratio as the predetermined advantageous value as compared with the case where is not set (for example, the determination process of S3704 in FIG. 47 is performed, It is characterized by performing the processing of S3708 and performing the processing of S3709). With such a configuration, a predetermined advantageous value of a type related to the set specific effect is easily provided, so that a predetermined advantageous value preferred by the player can be provided, and the predetermined advantageous value is given to the player. Can make you feel the joy of In addition, since it is possible to set the specific effect and increase the motivation to play the game, the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Means 7) A further aspect of the gaming system according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1) which allows a player to play a predetermined game and outputs information specifying a gaming history. A gaming system (for example, the gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, the management device 1200) for acquiring and managing information output from the gaming machine, and a plurality of types of predetermined advantageous values (for example, items) Right granting means for granting the right to grant any of A or item B) according to the game history (for example, the part performing the processing of S2604 to S2607 in FIG. 28 and performing the processing of S2611), Advantage value determining means for determining a predetermined advantage value to be granted based on the rights granted by the means (for example, determination processing of S3703 and S3713 of FIG. 47) To perform the processing of S3710) and advantageous value type selection means for the player to arbitrarily select the type of desired predetermined advantageous value (for example, the portion to perform the processing of S3706 and S3715 of FIG. 47) The advantage value determining means includes a type selected by the player by the advantage value type selecting means when the game frequency is higher than the predetermined frequency than when the game frequency is not higher than the predetermined frequency. It is characterized in that it is decided to apply a predetermined advantageous value at a high rate (for example, a portion that performs the determination processing of S3705 in FIG. 47 and performs the processing of S3708 and performs the processing of S3709). With such a configuration, the predetermined advantageous value favored by the player is given according to the frequency of the game, so the player can be motivated to play the game and the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Means 8) In Means 6, the first right (for example, silver coin or copper coin) and the right of a type related to the specific effect set by the player are given as the right to give a predetermined advantageous value. A second right (for example, a gold coin) having a high ratio may be set, and notification means (for example, a portion that performs the process of S2613 in FIG. 29) may be provided to notify that the second right has been obtained. According to such a configuration, since the player can identify that the predetermined advantageous value that he / she likes is given, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play the game again and to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. it can.

(Means 9) In Means 7, the first right (for example, silver coin or copper coin) and the kind of right set by the player are desired to be granted as the right to grant a predetermined advantageous value. Even if a second right (for example, a gold coin) having a high rate of being set is set, and notification means (for example, a portion that performs the process of S2613 in FIG. 29) for notifying that the second right is obtained Good. According to such a configuration, since the player can identify that the predetermined advantageous value that he / she likes is given, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play the game again and to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine. it can.

(Means 10) A condition changing means (for example, a portion that performs the process of S3707 in FIG. 47) for changing the conditions for giving a predetermined advantageous value according to the game history is provided in any of the means 6 to 9 You may do so. According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 11) Still another aspect of the gaming system according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700) which outputs predetermined information (for example, a two-dimensional code) according to the result of gaming. A gaming system (for example, the gaming system 1001) including a management device (for example, the management server 1200) for updating a gaming history based on predetermined information, wherein the gaming machine is configured to receive the first information For example, first updating means (for example, steps S2602 to S2603 in FIG. 28) for updating experience points, number of games, number of BBs, achieved mission, and second information (for example, gold, silver, The second updating means (for example, steps S2608 to S2611 in FIG. 28) for updating the number of coins of the copper coin), the first information updated by the first updating means, and 2 includes predetermined information output means (for example, steps S2808, S2809, S2812, S2813 in FIG. 31) for including the second information updated by the update means in the predetermined information, and the management apparatus outputs the predetermined information output means First aggregation means (for example, steps S3104 and S3105 in FIG. 41) for aggregating the first information included in the predetermined information output by the first information as first history information (for example, experience value, number of games, number of BBs, achieved mission) Second aggregation means (for example, FIG. 41) for aggregating the second information included in the predetermined information output by the predetermined information output means as the second history information (for example, the number of accumulated coins) in step S3205 and S3206 of FIG. (Steps S3104 and S3105) and the first history information tabulated by the first tabulation means For example, the game history output unit (for example, step S3109 in FIG. 41, step S3208 in FIG. 42) which outputs as the experience value, total number of games, cumulative BB count, achieved mission, and the second tabulated by the second tab It is characterized by including advantageous value giving means (for example, steps S3709 to S3716 in FIG. 47) for giving a predetermined advantageous value (for example, item) to the player according to the history information. With such a configuration, not only the first history information but also the second history information is added up according to the progress of the game, and not only the first history information is output as the game history, but also based on the game history, the first Since the predetermined advantageous value is given to the player in accordance with the history information, it is possible to improve the interest for the light user.

(Means 12) A still further aspect of the gaming system according to the present invention is capable of playing a predetermined game, and the first gaming related information related to the outcome of the gaming (for example, the total number of games and the number of BBs) , RB (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 700), and a management device including first game related information receiving means for receiving the first game related information output from the game machine ( For example, the gaming system includes a management server 1200), and the management device consumes a predetermined exchange value (for example, gold, silver, copper coin) to obtain a predetermined advantage value (for example, an item). Based on the first game related information received by the advantage value giving device (eg, steps S3709 to S3716 in FIG. 47) and the first game related information reception device. The first exchange value giving unit (for example, the second modification of FIG. 78) for giving a conversion value (for example, gold, silver, copper coin) is configured by the management server 1200, and the steps S2609 to S2611 of FIG. Game content distribution means (part for executing similar processing) and game content distribution means (for example, game application; see FIG. 50I) capable of playing a predetermined game to the player For example, the second game-related information receiving unit (for example, step S3601 in FIG. 46) and the second game-related information reception means (for example, for receiving points from the game application) related to the game result in the game content , Steps S3602 and S3603 of FIG. 46, and the second game-related information accepted by the second game-related information acceptance means A second exchange value giving means (eg, step S3604 in FIG. 46) for giving a second exchange value (eg, gold, silver, copper coin) based on the information; Even when the exchange value of 1 is consumed, a predetermined advantageous value is given even when the second exchange value is consumed (for example, in steps S3709 to S3716 in FIG. 47, the coin as the first exchange value) A process of giving an item is executed without discriminating whether it is a coin as a second exchange value or a second exchange value). With such a configuration, the game content distributed not only by consuming the first exchange value provided when receiving the first game related information related to the result of the game in the game machine but also by the management device Since it is also possible to receive a predetermined advantageous value by consuming the second exchange value given when the second game-related information related to the result of the game is received, the conventional gaming system and The advantage value giving function can be fully utilized by increasing the chance of being able to receive a predetermined advantage value by comparison.

FIG. 1 is a view showing an entire configuration of a game system according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a portable terminal. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the management server to which the management apparatus which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is applied. FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine to which a game machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement position of a photoelectric sensor. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of the part determined as winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the object role of the internal lottery by game state. It is a figure which shows the number of experience value provision according to a level and the number of games. It is an explanatory view showing a coin winning specification between games and a stock specification of stock coins. It is a figure which shows transition of a main menu screen. It is a figure showing a stock coin hint screen. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) for describing a password input operation. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the input operation of a password. (A) is a figure which shows a password analysis table, (b) is a figure which shows the analysis procedure of a password. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display condition at the time of the normal rendering mode of a specific effect area | region, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display condition at the time of specific rendering mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the output of a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows the information contained in a two-dimensional code. It is a figure showing the screen at the time of a stock coin winning lottery effect. It is a figure which shows the structure of the player database with which a management server is equipped, a game history database, and a privilege database. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process (sub) which sub CPU performs. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu display process performed by a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu operation processing before the password input performed by a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the password input reception process performed by a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the presentation screen when the password of a different model is input. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level / coin related process performed by a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the procedure of the level * coin related process in the case of alert | reporting a gold coin acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main menu operation processing after password input performed by a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the two-dimensional code display process performed by a slot machine. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a special effect execution process executed by the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows a predetermined | prescribed presentation process. It is an explanation showing a specific example of a predetermined effect determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of an effect mode of a predetermined effect. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a predetermined presentation process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect of a predetermined | prescribed production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect of a predetermined | prescribed production. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the server main process performed by a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the member registration process performed by a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the easy start update process performed by a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the normal update process performed by a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level and experience point update process performed by a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the menu selection reception process performed by a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the password issuing process performed by a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game provision process performed by a management server. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the item provision process performed by a management server. It is a figure which shows the lottery table used by item acquisition lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the item provision process performed by the management server of the slot machine which applied the game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen displayed on the display part of a portable terminal. It is a figure which shows exchange of the data between a portable terminal and a management server regarding member registration. It is a figure which shows exchange of each data between a slot machine and a portable terminal and a portable terminal, and a management server regarding easy start update. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating exchange of data between the slot machine and the portable terminal and between the portable terminal and the management server regarding normal updating. It is a figure which shows exchange of the data between a portable terminal and a management server regarding a privilege provision. It is a figure which shows the information contained in the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine which applied the game machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine to which a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention is applied. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure in the main board | substrate with which a pachinko game machine is provided. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. FIG. 35 is an explanatory view showing a coin earning specification among games and stock specification of stock coins in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution area of a predetermined | prescribed effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed presentation performed by a roulette aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed presentation performed by a roulette aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed presentation performed by a roulette aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the predetermined | prescribed effect which alert | reports the alerting | reporting result of a loss is performed in a roulette aspect, before alerting | reporting that a specific effect (reach effect) is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed presentation performed by a dice | dies aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed presentation performed by a dice | dies aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the predetermined | prescribed presentation performed by a dice | dies aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in case the predetermined | prescribed effect which alert | reports the alerting | reporting result of a loss is performed by a dice | dies mode, before alerting | reporting that a specific effect (reach effect) is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined presentation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined presentation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined presentation process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st predetermined presentation determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a first predetermined effect mode determination table and a first predetermined effect color determination table. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd predetermined presentation processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd predetermined presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd predetermined presentation mode determination table and a 2nd predetermined presentation color determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a combination pattern of composition in a game system. (A) is a figure which shows the winning probability of the coin discharged | emitted, (b) is a figure which shows the winning probability of a stock coin. It is a figure which shows the recovery conditions of point, and the number of recovery points.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

First Embodiment
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an entire configuration of a game system 1001 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming system 1001 is a slot machine 1 to which the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention is applied, and a management server 1200 to which the management apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention is applied. It consists of

  The slot machine 1 is installed in a game arcade (hall), and the management server 1200 is connected to the Internet network 900. Data exchange between the slot machine 1 and the management server 1200 is performed via a portable terminal 1100 having a two-dimensional code reading function and a connection function to the Internet network 900.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the portable terminal 1100 of this embodiment. The portable terminal 1100 includes a control unit 110, a storage unit 120, an operation unit 130, a display unit 140, a wireless communication unit 150, an antenna 151, and a camera unit 160.

  The storage unit 120 is configured by semiconductor memory such as nonvolatile memory such as ROM (Read Only Memory) and flash memory, and volatile memory such as RAM (Random Access Memory). The storage unit 120 stores programs and data such as an application program for causing the control unit 110 to execute various functions of the mobile terminal 1100.

  The operation unit 130 includes a dial key, a cross control key, and other function keys for inputting numbers such as telephone numbers and various data, alphabets, and other characters. Alternatively, the operation unit 130 may be configured to include a touch panel. Operation unit 130 receives an operation input from the user, and sends a signal related to the received operation to control unit 110.

  The display unit 140 is configured of a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display, hereinafter referred to as “LCD”). The display unit 140 may be configured by a display device such as an EL (Electro Luminescence) display. The display unit 140 displays character data and image data supplied from the control unit 110.

  The wireless communication unit 150 sends a signal received from another portable terminal or server via the antenna 151 to the control unit 110, and causes the antenna 151 to output a signal to be transmitted from the control unit 110 to another portable terminal or server.

  The camera unit 160 captures an image of an object to be captured according to the operation of the player, converts the captured image into image data, and supplies the image data to the control unit 110. In this embodiment, the camera unit 160 captures a two-dimensional code.

The control unit 110 is configured by a microprocessor (Micro Processing Unit, hereinafter referred to as “MPU”). The control unit 110 processes data from the storage unit 120, the operation unit 130, the display unit 140, the wireless communication unit 150, the camera unit 160, and the like according to a program such as an application program stored in the storage unit 120. The data after processing is supplied to the storage unit 120, the display unit 140, and the wireless communication unit 150.

  Note that the portable terminal 1100 may have a voice input / output function and an infrared communication function, which the general portable telephone has, in addition to the above configuration.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the management server 1200. As shown in FIG. The management server 1200 has a function as a general web server, and as shown in FIG. 3, includes a control unit 210, a storage unit 220, an operation unit 230, a display unit 240, and a communication unit 250. Including.

  The storage unit 220 is configured of a ROM, a RAM, an external storage device such as a flash memory or a hard disk drive, and the like. The storage unit 220 stores programs and data for causing the control unit 210 to execute various functions of the management server 1200.

  The operation unit 230 includes an input device such as a keyboard, a mouse, a keypad, a touch pad, and a touch panel. The operation unit 230 receives an operation input from a user such as a manager of the management server 1200, and sends a signal related to the received operation to the control unit 210.

The display unit 240 is configured of, for example, an LCD. The display unit 240 may be configured by another display device such as a CRT (Cathode RayTube) display or an EL display.
The display unit 240 displays character data and image data supplied from the control unit 210.

  The communication unit 250 supplies data received from the mobile terminal 1100 or another server via the Internet network 900 to the control unit 210, and the data supplied from the control unit 210 is transmitted via the Internet network 900 to the mobile terminal. Send to 1100 or other servers.

  The control unit 210 is configured of, for example, an MPU. The control unit 210 processes the data from the storage unit 220, the operation unit 230, the display unit 240, the communication unit 250, etc. according to the program stored in the storage unit 220, and stores the processed data in the storage unit 220, The operation unit 230, the display unit 240, and the communication unit 250 are supplied.

  Next, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. First, the structure and electrical configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The slot machine 1 comprises, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, a housing 1a having a front opening, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. .

  Inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 5, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, right reel 2R) in which plural kinds of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 4, three consecutive symbols are provided on the front door 1b among the symbols arranged on the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. It is disposed so as to be visible from the see-through window 3.

  As shown in FIG. 7, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “outside” on the outer peripheral portions of the left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, and right reel 2R, respectively. A plurality of kinds of mutually distinguishable symbols such as "replay", "watermelon", "cherry", "bell" and "orange" are drawn in a predetermined order, 21 each for each reel 2. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are displayed on the see-through window 3 in upper, middle, and lower three stages, respectively.

  The respective reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated by corresponding reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIGS. 5 and 8). Thereby, the symbols of the respective reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed while being continuously changed in the see-through window 3. Further, by stopping the rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, three consecutive symbols are drawn out and displayed as a display result on the transparent window 3.

  Reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R for detecting the reference position and reel LEDs 55 for irradiating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R from the back are provided on the inner side of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. ing. The reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, and is configured to be capable of irradiating each symbol independently.

  At a position corresponding to each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R in the front door 1b, a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 which allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen through from the front side is provided. The respective reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side via the above.

  On the front door 1b, using a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals (value for gaming), a medal payout opening 9 for paying out medals, and a credit (the number of medals stored as gaming value owned by a player) MAX BET switch operated when setting the maximum number of bets (3 cards in any game state in this embodiment) out of the defined number of bets determined according to the game state within that range 6. Settling switch 10 which is operated when the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the number of bets are settled (the medals used for setting the credits and the number of bets are returned) and the game is started Use for stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R which is operated when stopping the rotation of start switch 7 and each reel 2L, 2C, 2R which are operated at the time of each Effect switch 56 for (CHANCE buttons) are provided operable by the player.

  In addition, on the front door 1b, a credit indicator 11 is displayed on which the number of medals stored as credits is displayed, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of winnings, an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs, etc. Game assist indicator 12, 1 BET LED 14 notifying that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2 BET LED 15 notifying that the bet number is set to 2 by lighting, that the bet number is set to 3 3 BET LED 16 to notify by lighting up, input request LED 17 to notify by light that the medal can be inserted, start effective LED 18 to notify by lighting that the game start operation by the operation of start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Wait for the reels to start spinning because a certain period of time has not passed since the game started That state) in wait for notifying by lighting a a is that in LED 19, a game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAX BET switch 6, a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 7) is provided to notify by lighting that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAX BET switch 6 is enabled, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, The left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 8) are provided in the interior of 8R to notify by lighting that the stop operation of the reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. It is done.

  Inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state to be described later and a reset operation for releasing a suspension state to be described later by a predetermined key operation, changing setting values to be described later and checking setting values The setting value display 24 displays the setting value at that point, and the pause function enables / disables the pause mode (state in which the progress of the game is restricted until the reset operation is made) at the end of BB described later. Switch 36a for selecting an option, and an automatic settlement function that controls automatic settlement processing (processing to settle (return) the medal stored as a credit without the operation of the player) at the end of BB described later. The automatic adjustment switch 36b for selecting invalidity, the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and a hopper tank 34a described later provided inside the housing 1a (see FIG. 5) ) Having a channel switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the side or the medal payout port 9 side, and the inserted medal sensor 31 inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 and detecting medals flowing down to the hopper tank 34a side A medal selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 8) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  Inside the housing 1a, reel sensors 33L and 33C capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the above-mentioned left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, right reel 2R, reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and each reel 2L, 2C and 2R. 33R (see FIG. 8), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and medals stored in the hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out the medals from the medal payout opening 9 and a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  At the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided in which the medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a are stored. Inside the overflow tank 35 is provided a full tank sensor 35a consisting of a pair of conductive members spaced apart to the left and right at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals, and the conductive member is an overflow tank 35. It can be detected that the medal storage amount stored inside becomes more than a predetermined amount when conducting by contact via the medal stored inside, that is, the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  The front panel of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a halt state under normal conditions. There is provided a reset / setting switch 38 which functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value of an internal lottery winning probability (ball-out rate) to be described later, and a power switch 39 operated when turning on / off the power. .

  When playing a game in the slot machine 1 having such a configuration, the player first inserts a medal from the medal insertion portion 4 or sets a bet number using a credit. To use the credit, the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, the paylines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 4) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, three cards are set as the defined number of bets regardless of the gaming state, and when the defined number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 become effective. When the medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number among the prescribed numbers corresponding to the gaming state, that amount is added to the credit.

  The pay line is a line set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed in the see-through window 3 of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is a combination of pay symbols. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning line L1 set across symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and a symbol arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R The pay line L2 set across the two, the pay line L3 set across the symbols arranged at the bottom of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the top of the left reel 2L, the middle of the middle reel 2C, the bottom of the right reel 2R, That is, it is set across the winning line L4, the lower part of the left reel 2L, the middle of the middle reel 2C, and the upper part of the right reel 2R, that is, the symbols lined up to the right. Five types of pay line L5 are defined as a pay line.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are continuously varied. In this state, when any stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated, the rotation of the corresponding left reel 2L, middle reel 2C, right reel 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the perspective window 3.

  And one game is ended by stopping all the reels (right reel 2L, middle reel 2C and right reel 2R), and a combination of symbols predetermined on the activated pay line (active pay line) When (hereinafter also referred to as a winning combination) is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, a winning occurs, and the number of medals determined according to the winning is awarded to the player, It is added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), the medals are directly paid out from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 4). In addition, when the combination of symbols with the payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the number of payouts determined for each combination of the symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled The medal is to be awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the payout number of medals awarded in one game, and when the total payout number exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when the combination of the symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on the pay line, the gaming state according to the combination of the symbols is shifted to .

  As shown in FIG. 6, in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display 51, a light emitting element 57a and a light receiving element 57b which constitute the photoelectric sensor 57 (see FIG. 8) are provided. When the irradiation light from the light emitting element 57 a is reflected by the detection target (for example, the portable terminal 1100) in the area in front of the liquid crystal display 51, the light receiving element 57 b receives the reflected light. Then, by detecting the amount of light received by the light receiving element 57 b, it is detected whether or not the irradiation light of the light emitting element 57 a is reflected by the portable terminal 1100. As described in detail later, when the portable terminal 1100 is detected, the liquid crystal display 51 automatically displays a main menu screen for displaying a two-dimensional code including information such as a game history.

  In this embodiment, at a position in front of the liquid crystal display 51 and at a position where the light receiving element 57 b can receive the reflected light from the portable terminal 1100, a position where the two-dimensional code can be obtained by the portable terminal 1100 (i.e., the liquid crystal display 51 The position close to the area where the two-dimensional code is displayed is set as the specific area. As a result, the main menu screen is output only by performing an operation for acquiring the two-dimensional code at a position close to the area where the two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Therefore, when acquiring the two-dimensional code The annoyance felt by the player can be eliminated.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine 1. In the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 8, a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101 are provided. The gaming control board 40 controls the gaming state, the presentation control board 90 controls the presentation according to the gaming state, the power supply board 101 generates the drive power of the electric components constituting the slot machine 1, and each electric component Supplied to

  The power supply substrate 101 is externally supplied with power of AC 100V. The power supply substrate 101 generates a DC voltage necessary to drive each electric component constituting the slot machine 1 from the power supply of AC 100 V, and is connected to the effect control substrate 90 connected via the game control substrate 40 and the game control substrate 40. Supply.

  Further, to the power supply substrate 101, the above-described hopper motor 34b, the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 are connected.

  In the game control board 40, the above-mentioned MAX BET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, inserted medal sensor 31, door open The detection switch 25 and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described dispensing sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 101, Detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  In addition, the game control board 40 includes the above-mentioned credit display 11, game support display 12, display 13 for game, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, insertion request LED 17, start enable LED 18, wait LED 19 and replay LED 20, The BET switch enable LED 21, left, middle, right stop enable LEDs 22 L, 22 C, 22 R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32 L, 32 C, 32 R are connected. The above-described hopper motor 34 b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on the control of the main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a random number generation circuit 42, a sampling circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, and a disconnection detection. A circuit 48 and a reset circuit 49 are provided.

  The main control unit 41 includes a microcomputer including a main CPU 41a, a RAM 41b, a ROM 41c, and an I / O 41d, and controls a game. The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value each time a pulse is generated. The sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42, and outputs the acquired numerical value to the main control unit 41. The random number generation circuit 42 is set for each type of random number used for the progress of the game, and a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number is defined. The sampling circuit 43 acquires a numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number in accordance with an instruction of the main CPU 41 a.

  The configuration for acquiring the random number is not limited to the above-described configuration and is arbitrary. For example, the main CPU 41a may process or update various numerical values by software processing using different random counters based on the numerical values acquired from the sampling circuit 43. In this embodiment, the range of the above-mentioned random number value is a range of 16 bits, that is, a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

  The switch detection circuit 44 detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101. The motor drive circuit 45 performs drive control of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 performs drive control of the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit 47 performs drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power failure detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1, and when detecting a voltage drop, outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41. The reset circuit 49 sends a reset signal to the main CPU 41a when power is turned on or when an initialization instruction from the main CPU 41a is not input.

  The main CPU 41a has a clock function and an interrupt function (including an interrupt disable function) such as timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41c, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. It controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 directly or indirectly. The RAM 41 b is used as a work area or the like when the main CPU 41 a executes a program. The ROM 41c stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The I / O 41 d inputs / outputs control signals to / from each circuit connected via the signal input / output terminal of the main control unit 41.

  In addition, backup power is supplied to the main control unit 41 even during a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, data stored in the RAM 41 b is held.

  The main CPU 41a repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection states of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 change as the basic processing, and stepwise according to the change of the detection states of the various switches Execute the process of transitioning to Further, the main CPU 41a has the interrupt function as described above, and can interrupt the basic processing and execute the interrupt processing by the occurrence of the interrupt, and the voltage output from the power failure detection circuit 48 In response to the input of the lowering signal, the power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed, and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed at predetermined time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the combined time of the process to be repeated depending on the control state in the basic process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, at least the processing repeated according to the control state is always performed between the current and the next timer interrupt processing (main).

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O 41d. The command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and the command is not sent from the effect control board 90 toward the game control board 40.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the effect switch 56 (in this embodiment, the outer surface is described as "CHANCE button"), and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input. It has become.

  In addition, the rendering control board 90 is connected to a rendering device such as the liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 4) disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, the rendering effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above. These effect devices are driven based on control by a sub control unit 91 described later mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Furthermore, a photoelectric sensor 57 is connected to the effect control board 90. When light emitted from the light emitting element 57a is received by the light receiving element 57b, a detection signal is input. The sub control unit 91 detects the color of the object to be reflected based on the amount of light received by the light receiving element 57b, that is, the amount of light reflected by the object to be detected. Thereby, it is detected whether or not the detection target is the portable terminal 1100, and whether or not it is a player.

  In this embodiment, the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect apparatus such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55. Although there is an output control unit for directly controlling the output of the rendering device separately from the sub control unit 91, the output control unit is mounted on the effect control substrate 90 or another substrate, and the sub control unit 91 is based on the command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the rendering device may be determined, and the output control unit may perform output control of the rendering device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub control unit 91 and the output The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the control units.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the liquid crystal display 51, the presentation effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are illustrated as the presentation device, the presentation device is not limited to them, and is mechanically driven, for example. A display device or a mechanically driven combination may be applied as the effect device.

  The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91, a display control circuit 92, an LED drive circuit 93, an audio output circuit 94, a reset circuit 95, a switch detection circuit 96, a clock device 97, and a power failure detection circuit. And 98.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 is configured by a microcomputer including the sub CPU 91a, the RAM 91b, the ROM 91c, and the I / O 91d, and performs effect control. The display control circuit 92 performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. The LED drive circuit 93 controls the drive of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55. The audio output circuit 94 controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54. The reset circuit 95 sends a reset signal to the sub CPU 91 a when the power is turned on or when an initialization instruction from the sub CPU 91 a is not inputted for a predetermined time. The switch detection circuit 96 detects a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90. The clock device 97 outputs time information including date information and time information. The power failure detection circuit 98 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1, and when detecting a voltage drop, outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a.

  The sub CPU 91a receives various commands from the game control board 40 to perform various controls for effecting, and directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. . The sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt disable function) as the main CPU 41a. Among the command transmission lines, one of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line which is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and the sub CPU 91 a is a strobe signal. An interrupt is generated on the basis of the input and the command from the main control unit 41 is acquired, and a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer is executed. Further, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt each time the number of clock inputs reaches a fixed number, that is, at fixed intervals, and executes timer interrupt processing (sub) described later. Further, one of the interrupt terminals of the sub control unit 91 is connected to the power failure detection circuit 98, and the sub CPU 91a cuts off the power according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 98. Execute the import process (sub). Further, also in the sub CPU 91a, when an unused interrupt occurs, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Also, backup power is supplied to the sub control unit 91 at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, data stored in the RAM 91 b is held.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout rate of medals changes in accordance with the set value. Specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in the internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of six steps of 1 to 6, and the payout rate is the highest at 6 and the payout rate decreases as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the degree of advantage is the highest for the player, and the degree of advantage decreases stepwise as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. The set values may be set in three steps such as 1, 3, 6, 1, 4, 4, H (High), or seven steps from 1 to 7, and it is not necessary to limit to six steps.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, the setting value read from the RAM 41b is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to setting change status. In the setting change state, when the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when the setting 6 is further operated, the setting is returned to the setting 1) . Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41 b of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state where the game can be progressed.

  Further, in order to confirm the setting value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned ON in the state where the bet number is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read from the RAM 41b is displayed on the setting value display 24 to shift to a setting confirmation state where the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game can not be progressed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the OFF state, the setting confirmation state is ended and the game can be returned to the state in which the progress of the game is possible.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a detects a voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48, the power failure interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt process (main), the main CPU 41a saves the stored value of the register to a stack of the RAM 41b described later, and the data for destruction diagnosis (1AH in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 41b. That is, while storing specific data other than 0, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that RAM parity based on data stored in all areas of the RAM 41b becomes 0, and is stored in the RAM 41b. Here, the RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of the values stored in the respective bits of the corresponding area (in this embodiment, all the areas) of the RAM 41b. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 41b is 0, the data for RAM parity adjustment is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 41b is 1. For example, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  Then, the main CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 41b at the time of startup, and confirms the value of the data for destruction diagnosis, the RAM parity is 0, and the destruction diagnosis Under the condition that the value of the data for processing is also correct, the processing state of the main CPU 41a is restored to the state before power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41b. However, the main CPU 41a determines that the RAM is abnormal if the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destruction diagnostic data is incorrect, and sets the RAM abnormal error code in the register and the RAM abnormal error It is made to transition to the state and disable the progress of the game. Note that unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the above-described setting change state. It will not be released until

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a also detects the voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 98, it executes the power failure interrupt process (sub). In the power interruption interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a saves the stored value of the register to the stack of the RAM 91b described later, stores the data for destructive diagnosis for which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 91b, and all the RAM 91b The data for adjusting the RAM parity is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in the area is 0, and stored in the RAM 91b.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91b at the time of startup, and based on the data stored in the RAM 91b on condition that the RAM parity is 0. The processing state of the sub CPU 91a is restored to the state before power interruption. However, when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1), the sub CPU 91a determines that the RAM is abnormal and initializes the RAM 91b. In this case, unlike the case of the main CPU 41a, the RAM 91b is only initialized, and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41 b of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41 b of the main control unit 41 is divided into important work, general work, special work, set value work, stop phase work, non-saved work, unused area, and stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to initialize at the end of BB is stored, such as various display devices and LED display data, I / O 41d input / output data, gaming time counter, etc. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of BB is stored, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out during BB. The special work is a work in which data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90, various software random numbers, etc. are stored data which is initialized only before the start of setting. The set value work is a work in which the set value used when performing the lottery in the internal lottery process is stored, and after 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting start (before the transition to the setting change mode), It is corrected and the setting value newly set at the end of setting (at the time of ending to the setting change mode) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are in the stop state, data indicating the stop phase is stored The Rukoto. The non-saved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and the value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41 b is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41b, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area for storing data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a, and the unused stack area among them is satisfied with any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later, similarly to the unused area. If you do, it will be initialized, but the stack area in use will not be initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, when the main CPU 41a is activated with both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 turned on, when a RAM abnormal error occurs, when the setting key switch 37 is activated only. , BB, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both off, when the data of the RAM 41 b is not destroyed at the time of activation, the initialization condition consisting of six at the end of one game is When satisfied, five different types of initialization are performed according to the respective initialization conditions.

  The initialization 0 is performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON at the time of activation, and initialization is performed prior to the transition to the setting change mode, or when an RAM error occurs. In initialization, in initialization 0, all areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the storage area of the RAM 41b except for the used stack area are initialized. The initialization 1 is in a state where only the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of startup, and is an initialization performed before the transition to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, of the storage areas of the RAM 41b, All areas (including unused area and unused stack area) except the used stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. The initialization 2 is an initialization performed at the end of the BB. In the initialization 2, the general work, the unused area and the unused stack area among the storage areas of the RAM 41 b are initialized. The initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are off at startup and the data in the RAM 41 b is not destroyed, and the initialization 3 is not performed. Saved work, unused area and unused stack area are initialized. The initialization 4 is performed at the end of one game. In the initialization 4, the unused area and the unused stack area of the storage area of the RAM 41 b are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before the transition of the setting change mode, but may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is determined. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the set value determined is lost, so initialization of the set value work is not performed.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the defined number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the defined number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. It is possible to start the game on the condition that In this embodiment, although it will be described later, there are regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB) and normal gaming state as gaming states, and 3 is defined as the specified number of bets in any gaming state. The game can be started when 3 is set as the number of bets regardless of the gaming state. In this embodiment, all the pay lines L1 to L5 are activated when the defined number of bets according to the game state is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all reels (left reel 2L, middle reel 2C and right reel 2R) are stopped, a symbol called a winning combination on an activated pay line (hereinafter simply referred to as a pay line) is used. It will be a prize when the combination of is complete. The role may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but can be roughly divided into a small combination with payout of medals and the need to set the number of bets, and the next game can be started again There are a game role and a special role accompanied by a transition of the game state. In the following, the small part and the re-play part are collectively referred to as a general part. In order to generate a winning of each combination determined in accordance with the gaming state, it is necessary to win an internal lottery described later, and to set a winning flag of the combination to the RAM 41b.

  Note that among the winning flags of these respective roles, the winning flags of the small winning combination and the re-playing combination are made effective only in the game in which the flag is set, and become invalid in the next game, but the winning flag of the special combination is The combination is valid until the combination of the combination accepted by the flag is complete, and the combination is invalidated in the game. That is, once the winning combination of the special part is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag can not be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It will be.

  As a role in the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 9, a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB) as a special role and a big bonus (1), (2) (hereinafter referred to as BB (1), (2) ) Is defined. Also, watermelons, cherries, and bells are defined as minors, and replays are defined as replays.

  The cherries are won when any combination of "Cherry-ANY-BELL" or "Cherry-ANY-Replay" is arranged in any of the pay lines for the left reel 2L in any game state, ie, the left reel 2L It will be a prize when the symbol of "Cherry" is derived in any of the lines, and the symbol of "Bell" or "Replay" is derived in the pay line where "Cherry" stopped in the left reel 2L of the right reel 2R, Two medals are paid out.

  Watermelon becomes a prize when the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is aligned with any of the pay lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  The bell is awarded when a combination of "bell-bell-bell" is aligned with any of the pay lines in any gaming state, and twelve medals are paid out.

  Replay is a prize when the combination of "replay-replay-replay" is complete on the pay line in the normal gaming state. When Replay wins, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started again without setting the number of bets, so 3 medals are paid out corresponding to the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game. It will be substantially the same as

  The RB becomes a prize when the combination of "network 7-network 7-black 7" is aligned with any of the pay lines in the gaming state other than RB, and the gaming state shifts to RB. RB is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than other gaming states due to an increase in the probability of winning a small winning combination, in particular, the bell, and when 12 RBs have been consumed, 12 games have been consumed, or 4 game wins ( Any kind of role is acceptable), whichever ends earlier.

  BB (1) is a prize when the combination of "black 7-black 7-black 7" is complete in any of the pay lines in the gaming state other than RB. BB (2) is a prize when the combination of "white 7-white 7-white 7" is complete in any of the pay lines in the gaming state other than RB.

  When BB (1) (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB and simultaneously shifts to RB, and when RB ends, if BB does not end, it transitions to RB again and BB ends It is repeatedly controlled to the RB state. That is, during BB, it will always be controlled to the RB state. Then, the BB ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player during the BB exceeds 480. At the end of the BB, the RB also ends regardless of whether the end condition of the RB is satisfied.

  Subsequently, the internal lottery of this embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, whether or not the above-mentioned winning combinations for each combination are allowed is derived (in fact, before the display results of all the reels (left reel 2L, middle reel 2C and right reel 2R) are derived and displayed. When the start switch 7 is detected). In the internal lottery, first, a random number for the internal lottery (an integer of 0 to 65535) is acquired. Then, for each winning combination determined in accordance with the gaming status and the presence or absence of the special winning combination, the acquired random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each winning combination determined according to the gaming status, the bet number and the set value A lottery will be held accordingly.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the roles to be subject to the internal lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the RB (BB), and in the normal gaming state, The target of the internal lottery also differs depending on whether or not the special part is being carried over (normal: the normal gaming state in which the special part is not carried over, the winning state: the normal gaming state in which the special part is carried over).

  If the gaming state is normal gaming state and the special part is not carried over, then RB, BB (1), BB (2), RB + watermelon, RB + cherry, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + Cherries, BB (2) + watermelons, BB (2) + cherries, replays, watermelons, cherries, bells are read out in order as the target part of the internal lottery.

  If the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the special part is carried over, replay, watermelon, cherry and bell are read out in order as the target part of the internal lottery.

  If the gaming state is RB (BB), watermelon, cherries and bells are read out in order as the target role of the internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the judgment value number of each winning combination determined corresponding to the current gaming state and the set value is sequentially added to the random number for the internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, the winning combination is won It is determined to be a thing. Therefore, the winning combination is won with the probability (number of judgment values / 65536) according to the magnitude of the number of judgment values.

  If it is determined in the internal lottery that the winning of any one of the winning combinations is made, the main CPU 41a sets a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined in the winning combination storing task assigned to the RAM 41b. The internal winning flag storage work is configured by a 2-byte storage area, the upper byte of which is assigned as a special role storage work in which the special winning flag is set, and the lower byte is a general winning The flag is assigned as a general role storing work to be set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, the main CPU 41a sets a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination has been selected to the special combination storing work, and the winning combination flag set in the general combination storing work Clear When the general combination is won, the main CPU 41a sets a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination has been selected in the general combination storing work. If no combination of the combination and the combination is not won, only the general combination storing work is cleared.

  Next, stop control of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. When the respective reels 2L, 2C, 2R start to rotate, or when one of the reels is stopped and there is a non-stopped reel, the main CPU 41a is for table index and table creation stored in the ROM 41c. With reference to the data, a stop control table for each rotating reel is created. Then, when the operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected, the main CPU 41a refers to the stop control table of the corresponding reel and slides the stop control table referred to Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a detects an operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, control when causing the corresponding reel to derive the display result will be described. When the main CPU 41a detects the operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the number of steps from the reel reference position (for example, the 0th area) at the time of detecting the stop operation. The area number of the stop operation position is specified based on the stop operation table of the reel where the stop operation is detected, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, the main CPU 41a performs control to rotate and stop the reel by the acquired number of sliding symbols. Thus, the area corresponding to the area number corresponding to the area number corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected from the area number corresponding to the number of sliding symbols is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the see-through window It will stop in the area of the lower design of 3).

  Only one address corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state is stored in the table index of this embodiment. Further, only one address is stored in one table creation data as an address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop condition of one reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, the table creation data corresponding to the gaming state and the internal winning state, and the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop condition of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to these is also uniquely defined. Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the stop condition of the reels (and the stop position of the stopped reels) have the same condition, the main CPU 41a performs control based on the same stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four-frame symbol after detecting the stopping operation. That is, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from the range of maximum 5 frames including the stop operation position at which the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the symbol by one symbol, it is possible to pull in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation and stop the reel, and the stop having detected the stop operation Design stop position can be specified from the range of maximum 5 designs including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when one of the winning combinations is won, a stop control table is generated to perform control to pull in the winning combination on any pay line within the range of four frames. Further, when any combination is not won, a stop control table is generated such that control is performed such that none of the combinations are aligned on the pay line. That is, when one of the winning combinations is won, if a stop operation is performed within the range of 4 combinations of winning combinations, control is performed in which combinations of symbols according to the winning combinations are aligned, for example, the number of sliding symbols is stopped at 2 There is nothing to do. Further, when any combination is not won, even if one of the combinations is stopped in the range of 0 frames, since the number of sliding symbols is set, control is performed in which none of the combinations are aligned .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the "bell" of the left reel 2L, the "bell" of the middle reel 2C, and the "bell" of the right reel 2R are arranged at an interval of 4 frames or less, and when the bell is won, Whatever time the stop operation of the reel is performed, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is always aligned on the pay line, and the bell is won. In addition, “Replay” on the left reel 2L, “Replay” on the middle reel 2C, and “Replay” on the right reel 2R are also arranged at an interval of 4 frames or less, and when replay is won, stop operation of each reel At any timing, the combination of "replay-replay-replay" is always on the pay line, and the replay is won.

  On the other hand, "Cherry" of the left reel 2L is arranged at an interval exceeding 7 frames, and when cherry is won, the "Cherry" stop operation is performed at the timing when it becomes the pulling range of "Cherry". The combination of "-ANY-BELL" or "CHERRY-ANY-REPLAY" is aligned with the pay line and the cherry will be won. On the other hand, if the stop operation of the right reel 2R is performed at the timing when it falls outside the pull-in range of "cherry", the cherry will not be won and will be dropped.

  In addition, “watermelon” on the left reel 2L, “watermelon” on the middle reel 2C, and “watermelon” on the right reel 2R also have points arranged at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and when watermelon is won, “watermelon” If the stop operation of each reel is performed at the timing of the lead-in range, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” will be aligned on the pay line, and the watermelon will be won. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed at any one reel at a timing when it falls outside the lead-in range of "watermelon", the watermelon will not be won and will be dropped.

  Also, for BB (1) to (2), there are places where the design symbols are arranged at intervals exceeding 4 frames, and even if any of BB (1) to (2) is won, the BB is won If the stop operation of each reel is performed at the timing when it comes to the draw-in range of the configuration symbol, the won BB will be won, but it is at the timing when any one reel is out of the draw-in range of the won BB design symbol. If the stop operation is performed, BB will not win and will be dropped. It should be noted that even if BB is dropped as described above, it will be carried over to the next game, so once it wins BB, even if it is dropped, winning is achieved by performing a stop operation at an appropriate timing after the next game. It is possible to

  The special role and the small role are won at the same time, for example, if the small role is won while the special role has been carried over before the previous game, or the special role and the small role are simultaneously won without the special role being carried over. If it is determined that the number of sliding pieces has been determined so as to draw in the winning combination of the winning combination on the winning line within the range of 4 frames to the maximum, the winning combination of the winning combination on the winning line For the stop operation position that can not be withdrawn in the range of the top, create a stop control table with the number of sliding symbols determined so as to draw in the winning combination on the pay line to the maximum within the range of 4 tops, and stop the reel Take control. As a result, when it is possible to align and stop the small winning combination in the lead-in range of up to 4 pieces on the pay line when the stop operation is performed, the control to align and stop this is performed, and the prize is won If it is not possible to draw in the small winning combination in the draw-in range of up to 4 pieces on the line, if it is possible to align and stop the special part winning in the draw-in range of up to 4 pieces on the pay line, Control to align and stop is performed. In other words, the player who has not won is controlled to be removed and stopped within the lead-in range of four frames. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the small winning combination on the pay line has priority over the special winning combination, and it becomes possible to make the special winning combination effective only when the small winning combination can not be drawn.

  In this embodiment, when the special character and the small character are simultaneously elected, the control of aligning the small character on the pay line has priority over the special character, and the special character is not special. It is possible to win the winning combination, but the control to arrange the special winning combination on the winning line has priority over the small winning combination, and it is possible to win the small winning combination only when the special winning combination can not be drawn. May be configured as follows.

  The special role and the re-playing role are selected when, for example, the re-playing role is won with the special role carried over from before the previous game, or the special role and the re-playing role are simultaneously won with the special role not carried over. If the player has won at the same time, when the stop operation is performed, control is performed to align and stop the symbols of the replay role on the pay line within the lead-in range of up to 4 pieces. In this case, the symbols constituting the replay role are disposed within 5 symbols for any of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, that is, within 4 frames, and the drawing of 4 frames is performed. Since the player can always stop at any position within the range, when the special part and the re-playing part are simultaneously elected, the player must always re-execute regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. The game players will all be together and win a prize. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the re-play combination on the pay line has priority over the special combination, and the re-play combination will always be won.

  In this embodiment, after the main CPU 41a starts rotating the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. The rotation of no reel is continued, and control is performed to stop the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Even when the reel rotation is temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the reel rotation is resumed. The rotation of the non-reel 2 is continued, and control is performed to stop the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, the control for stopping the corresponding reel is performed on condition that the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, but after the rotation of the reel is started, in advance, When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even when the stop operation of the reels is not performed, automatic stop control may be performed to automatically stop each reel, assuming that the stop operation has been performed. . In this case, since the reel is stopped without the operation of the player, it is preferable to derive a display result which does not constitute any combination, even if any combination is won. .

  Next, a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, a credit command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including status command, standby command, halt command, error command, return command, setting start command, check start command, check end command, and operation detection command are transmitted.

  These commands are composed of 1-byte type data indicating the type of command and 1-byte extension data indicating the contents of the command, and the sub CPU 91a can determine the type of command from the type data.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, and is a state from the end of the game (after the setting change) to the start of the game. In the state where the number is not set, it is transmitted when the medal is inserted or the bet number is set by operating the MAX BET switch 6. Further, since the BET command is transmitted when the bet number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the bet number setting operation is performed by receiving the bet command.

  The credit command is a command capable of specifying the number of medals stored as a credit, and is in a state from the end of the game (after the change of setting) to the start of the game, and in a state where the specified number of bets is set, Sent when medals are inserted and credits are added.

  The internal winning command is a command that can identify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. Further, since the internal winning command is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to specify that the starting switch 7 has been operated by receiving the internal winning command.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of the rotation of the reel, and is transmitted when the rotation of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R is started.

  The reel stop command can specify whether the reel to be stopped is any of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel Command is transmitted each time stop control is performed in connection with the stop operation of each reel. Further, since the reel stop command is transmitted when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, it is possible to specify that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by receiving the reel stop command. .

  The prize determination command is a command capable of specifying the presence or absence of a prize, the type of prize, and the number of medals paid out at the time of prize, and is transmitted after all reels are stopped and a prize determination is made.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying start of medal payout, and is transmitted when payout of medals is started by winning or winning a credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the medal payout end, and is transmitted when the payout of the medal due to the winning and the settlement of credits is finished.

  The game state command is a command capable of specifying the game state of the next game, and is transmitted at the end of the setting change state and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating transition to the standby state, and it is used for setting the credit (when the number of bets is not set after one game is over and a certain period of time passes before transition to the standby state It is sent after the payout of medals by the settlement of medals (including medals) is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The suspension command is a command indicating the occurrence or cancellation of the suspension state, and when the ending effect waiting time elapses after the BB is completed, the suspension command indicating the occurrence of the suspension state is transmitted, and the reset operation is performed. When the suspension state is released, a suspension command indicating release of the suspension state is transmitted.

  The error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition, and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and controlled to an error condition, an error command indicating the occurrence of an error condition and its type is sent. When the reset operation is performed and the error state is released, an error command indicating the release of the error state is transmitted.

  The restoration command is a command indicating that the main CPU 41a has returned to the control state before power interruption, and is transmitted when the main CPU 41a is restored to the control state before power interruption.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting change state. Further, since the control state of the main CPU 41a is initialized along with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the main CPU 41a has been initialized by the setting start command.

  The confirmation start command is a command indicating the start of the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when shifting to the setting confirmation state. The confirmation end command is a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state, and is transmitted when the setting confirmation state is ended.

  The operation detection command is a command indicating the detection state (ON / OFF) of the operation switches (MAX BET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted at regular intervals.

  Among the above commands, a setting start command, an error command indicating a RAM abnormality, and a return command are generated at a stage before the interrupt is permitted in the start processing, and the specific command sent assigned to the special work of the RAM 41b. Stored in the credit buffer and sent immediately.

  Commands other than the setting start command, the error command indicating a RAM abnormality, the return command, and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the game processing, and temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41b It is stored and transmitted in timer interrupt processing (main).

  In this embodiment, commands are generated in the game processing and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main), when the unsent command stored in the command transmission buffer is detected, the unsent command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  In addition, the normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a plurality of commands, and a newly generated command is stored without waiting for transmission of the unsent command stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is possible to store in the free area of the normal command transmission buffer.

  Further, when storing the commands in the normal command transmission buffer in the game processing, the main CPU 41a stores the commands in the generation order, and in the command transmission processing, in the order generated and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. Send a command That is, the commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order of generation and storage.

  The operation detection command is generated each time the command transmission process is executed five times, is stored in the above-mentioned specific command transmission buffer, and is immediately transmitted. In addition, when the transmission timing of the operation detection command is reached in a state where the unsent command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the transmission of the operation detection command is prioritized and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. Some unsent commands are to be sent in the next command sending process. That is, a plurality of commands are not transmitted in one command transmission process.

  Next, based on a command that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90, control of effects performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes command reception interrupt processing when a strobe signal indicating transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91 b.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer, and if an unprocessed command is stored, the earliest one of them is stored. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91c is referred to based on the received command, and various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Control the output of the device.

  In the control pattern table, display patterns of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the types of commands, lighting modes of the rendering effect LEDs 52, output modes of the speakers 53 and 54, lighting modes of the reel LEDs 55, etc. Among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91b in the game of the control pattern table, the control pattern of these effect devices is registered, and the sub CPU 91a receives the command when the command is received. The control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command is referred to, and the output control of the rendering device is performed based on the control pattern. As a result, an effect corresponding to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is performed.

  When the sub CPU 91a newly receives a command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a cancels the effect based on the control pattern in execution, and corresponds to the newly received command. The effect based on the control pattern is to be executed. That is, even when the effect is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the effect currently being executed is canceled except when the received command is not a command that triggers a new effect, and a new command is received. The effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the bet number setting operation is performed during the execution of the effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives the BET command indicating that the bet number has been set, the effect being executed is Discontinue. For this reason, when the player wants to advance the next game rather than watching the effect to the end, the effect is canceled and the next game can be started, so that the player does not feel bothersome. In addition, when the settlement operation of the credit or the number of bets is made during execution of the effect, that is, after sub CPU91a receives the game state command which shows the end of the game, before receiving the internal winning command which shows the start of the game If a payout start command is received, the effect currently being executed is canceled. It is when the game is ended that the checkout of the credit and the bet number is done, and although there is a will to end the game by ending the effect under execution in such a case, the effect continues unnecessarily. I try not to go away.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91 b. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91c, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the sub CPU 91a sets the level and effect setting described later as a result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. In response, the selection rate registered in the effect table is referred to, and any effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is used as the effect pattern of the game in RAM 91b. Set In this case, even if the same command is received, different control patterns are selected according to the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command capable of specifying that the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R have been operated to the sub CPU 91a. It is possible to specify that the operation switch detected by the main CPU 41a has been operated, regardless of whether or not the operation switch is involved in the game progress control in each control state. Therefore, the sub CPU 91a can execute effects in response to the operation of the operation switch not involved in the game progress control, or can execute processing in response to the player's operation through the main menu screen described later. .

  In addition, the main CPU 41a does not operate the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R regardless of whether the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R is operated. By periodically transmitting an operation detection command capable of specifying the ON / OFF state of the sub CPU 91a, the sub CPU 91a can periodically specify the ON / OFF state of these operation switches. Therefore, even if the sub CPU 91a misses the operation detection command, the sub CPU 91a can specify the latest detection state for all the operation switches based on the operation detection command to be transmitted next time, and the game progress control can be performed. The effect corresponding to the operation of the operation switch not involved in can be performed surely.

  Further, since the sub CPU 91a can specify the detection states of all the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R from the operation detection command, the simultaneous operation of a plurality of switches or a specific switch It is possible to perform effects that reflect the operating conditions of a plurality of operation switches, such as only an operation, and to achieve various effects using the operation of the operation switches.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether the main CPU 41a operates the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switch Although operation detection commands capable of specifying the ON / OFF states of each of 8L, 8C, and 8R are transmitted at regular intervals, only when the detection state (ON / OFF) of any operation switch changes, You may make it transmit the operation detection command which shows that. With such a configuration, transmission of the operation detection command can be reduced as much as possible, and the load of control related to transmission of the operation detection command can be reduced, and the sub CPU 91a side receives the operation detection command more than necessary. I do not have to.

  Also, when the detection state (ON / OFF) of any operation switch changes, an operation detection command that can specify the detection states of other operation switches in addition to the detection state of the operation switch is sent to sub CPU 91a. It may be configured to transmit. With such a configuration, transmission of the operation detection command can be reduced as much as possible, and the sub CPU 91a not only detects the detection state of the operation switch whose detection state has been changed from the operation detection command, but also performs other operations. The detection state of the means can also be specified, effects can be performed reflecting the operating conditions of a plurality of operation means, and effects using the operation of the operation switch can be diversified.

  The RAM 91 b of the sub control unit 91 has a detection state storage area in which the change state of the detection state of the operation switch is stored for each operation switch, and an operation detection flag indicating that the operation state of the operation switch has changed An operation detection flag storage area to be stored is allocated. Furthermore, in the detection state storage area, the detection state before receiving the operation detection command (previous time) and the detection state after receiving the operation detection command (this time) are assigned, and The detection state of each operation switch before and after reception is stored.

  The sub CPU 91a performs an operation detection process when determining that an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer in the timer interrupt process (sub). In the operation detection process, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command is an operation detection command, and when it is determined that the operation detection command is detected, the current detection state stored in the detection state storage area is the previous detection state. And the detection state of each operation switch indicated by the operation detection command is stored as the current detection state. At that time, if there is an operation switch in which the previous detection state and the current detection state are different, the sub CPU 91a sets the rising flag as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch when it changes from OFF to ON. When it changes from ON to OFF, a falling flag is set as an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a periodically transmits an operation detection command capable of specifying the detection states of all the operation switches regardless of whether the detection state of the operation switches has changed. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, the detection state of each operation switch before and after reception of the operation detection command stored in the detection state storage area is updated, and there is an operation switch having a different detection state. And an operation detection flag corresponding to the operation switch. The sub CPU 91a confirms the presence or absence of the operation detection flag, and in addition to the fact that the detection state of the operation switch has changed, how the detection state of each operation switch changes before and after reception of the operation detection command, that is, OFF It can be determined whether it has changed from ON to ON or from ON to OFF.

  Therefore, the sub CPU 91a can perform effects and change effects according to the timing when the operation of the operation switch is started, as well as the timing when the operation is canceled, and the sub CPU 91a is involved in the game progress control. Various effects can be performed according to the operation mode of the operation switch.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the change in the detection state of the operation switch, the sub CPU 91a can determine how the detection state of each operation switch has changed before and after reception of the operation detection command. However, the sub CPU 91a may be configured to be able to determine only that the operation switch has been operated, that is, it has been changed from OFF to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load of the sub CPU 91a accompanying the operation of the operation switch which does not affect the game progress control.

  The detection state of each operation switch is stored in the detection state storage area, and the sub CPU 91a sets one of the operation detection flags, and the change in the detection state of the operation switch corresponding to the operation detection flag When specified, it is possible to identify not only the operation switch whose detection state has changed, but also the detection state of other operation switches by confirming the detection state of the other operation switch in the detection state storage area. .

  Therefore, the sub CPU 91a can specify a state in which a plurality of operation switches are operated at the same time, and effects can be performed by operating a plurality of operation switches simultaneously, and the method of operating the plurality of operation switches Can produce various effects.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 91a performs effects by simultaneously operating the operation switches of the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C, the left stop switch 8L is detected and the right stop switch 8R is detected. When the operation of the middle stop switch 8C is detected in the absence state, the corresponding effect is performed. However, when both the left stop switch 8L and the right stop switch 8R are detected, when the operation of the middle stop switch 8C is detected, the operation of the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C is the same as described above. Although it is simultaneously detected, in this case, the corresponding effect is not performed.

  That is, when performing a specific operation effect according to the operation of a specific operation switch, when an operation switch other than the specific operation switch is operated together with the specific operation switch, the specific operation effect is not performed. It has become.

  For this reason, the specific operation presentation based on the operation of the specific operation switch is performed when the specific operation switch is operated at the same time as the other operation switch or when the other operation switch is operated. Is not performed, and no particular operation presentation is performed by an erroneous operation. For this reason, a specific operation effect can be provided only to a player who desires a specific operation effect.

  In addition, when the operation switches other than the specific operation switch are operated together with the specific operation switch as described above, a part of the operation switch for performing each effect by not performing the specific operation effect Even in the case of overlapping, it is possible to execute different effects. That is, one effect is executed by simultaneously operating the left stop switch 8L and the middle stop switch 8C, and the other effect is executed by simultaneously operating the middle stop switch 8C and the right stop switch 8R. However, when the middle stop switch is operated while the left stop switch and the right stop switch are operated at the same time, whether the left stop switch and the middle stop switch are simultaneously operated or the middle stop switch and the right stop switch are simultaneously operated. It becomes impossible to determine whether it is an operation or not, and it is only possible to assign an effect to only one of the simultaneous operations. However, when the operation switches other than the specific operation switch are operated together with the specific operation switch, the specific operation presentation is not performed, so that even in the case as described above, for each simultaneous operation. Effects can be assigned, and more various effects can be performed depending on how to operate the plurality of operation switches.

  In this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a gives an experience value on condition that a predetermined achievement condition is satisfied when a player inputs a password (key data) described later at the start of the game. 10 levels of experience are added each time a level is added. And each time the value of the level exceeds a certain value, the number of types of effects that may be executed is increased. More specifically, the effect table 1 used for levels 1 to 30, the effect table 2 used for levels 31 to 60, and the effect table 3 used for levels 61 to 99 are provided. In addition to the effect patterns registered in the effect table 1, effect patterns not registered in the effect table 1 are defined, and in the effect table 3, in addition to the effect patterns registered in the effect tables 1 and 2. Effect patterns not registered in the effect tables 1 and 2 are defined, and the level exceeds 30 by selecting the effect pattern using the effect table according to the current level among the effect tables 1 to 3 In the case of more than 60, the rendering pattern will increase.

  The experience value is stored in the experience value storage area allocated to the RAM 91 b.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a increases the items selectable as the effect setting each time the value of the level exceeds a certain value. More specifically, the frequency of effect (effect setting 1), the main character (effect setting 2), the character's costume (effect setting 3), the effect background design (effect setting 4), BGM (benefit) by the player's selection operation It is possible to select effect setting 5), and in these effect settings, it is possible to select from three types until the level exceeds 30 and becomes selectable from five types if the level exceeds 30 and exceeds level 60 And can be selected from eight types.

  As the achievement condition to which the experience value is given, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, when the continuous effect indicating the winning possibility of the special combination is executed and the special combination is won or deviates, the bonus confirmation screen is displayed. When it is displayed, etc., the difficulty level of each achievement condition, the current level, and the experience value given according to the number of games since the start of the game is determined, and the achievement condition is established. The experience value will be given according to the situation.

  A continuous effect B shown in FIG. 11 indicates that there is a high possibility that the special role is won as compared to the continuous effect A, that is, an effect in which the ratio selected at the winning of the special role is higher than the continuous effect A. It is an effect with a lower appearance rate than continuous effect A.

  The latter has more experience points when the continuous effect A is executed and the special role is not won and the continuous effect B is executed and the special role is not won. It is to be awarded, and it is possible to be awarded more experience points if the special part has not been won despite the high possibility of winning the special part. .

  In addition, the latter has more experience points when the continuous effect A is executed and the special role is not won, and the continuous effect A is executed and the special role is elected and the latter is more It is to be granted, and it is possible to be awarded more experience points if the special part has been elected despite the low possibility of winning the special part. .

  In addition, even when the same achievement condition is established, the experience value to be provided is different between 0 to 499 G, 500 to 699 G, and 700 G, and as the number of games increases, more experience values are provided. It has become.

  Also, whenever the value of the level exceeds a certain value, the experience value given decreases and the experience value given decreases. Specifically, if the level exceeds 30 and the level exceeds 60, the experience value to be given decreases, and depending on the achievement conditions, the experience value is not given. For this reason, it is difficult to further raise the level each time the level exceeds a certain value.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, an experience value is given by the achievement condition being established according to the result of playing a game, the level rises according to the experience value, and the effect pattern increases. In addition, the setting items of the effect are increased, and the player's willingness to play the game can be effectively enhanced.

  As the achievement conditions, conditions other than the conditions shown in FIG. 11 are prepared in advance, and include, for example, conditions under which the result of achievement of a specific mission can be obtained.

  Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a establishes predetermined conditions in the game when the player inputs a password (described later) or selects the “easy start” at the start of the game. Then, coins (three types of gold, silver, and copper), which are exchange values when receiving predetermined benefits from the management server 1200, are given to the player. The benefit includes, for example, music, wallpaper, content data such as a standby screen, or data (for example, a two-dimensional code) indicating an exchange ticket that can be exchanged for a predetermined article.

  FIG. 12A shows the coin acquisition specifications when the password is input. For example, when a bonus (any one of BB and RB) is won, one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded at a probability of 50%. In addition, at the time of cherry winning (specifically, at the time of winning), one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded with a probability of 100%. In addition, every 2000 games, one of gold, silver and copper coins is awarded with a probability of 100%. However, as the number of games increases, the probability that a good color coin (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) is given is increased.

  Also, when the mission is completed, coins are awarded with 100% probability according to the level of the achieved mission. For example, one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded at the completion of a level high mission. In addition, any two gold, silver or copper coins will be awarded when the mission during the level is achieved, and any one gold, silver or copper coin may be awarded when the level low mission is achieved. Be done. In addition to the acquisition of coins during such a game, the details will be described later, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  Furthermore, when a mission with a high level and a medium level is achieved, coins to be awarded are added on condition that there are stock coins to be described later. In this case, for example, any two coins of gold, silver and copper are additionally awarded when the mission of level high is achieved, and any of gold, silver and copper coins are awarded when the mission during level is achieved. One additional card is awarded.

  Further, in this embodiment, the degree of advantage of the coin acquisition condition is different between the case where the password is input and the case where the “easy start” is selected, and the “easy start” is obtained when the password is input. Coins can be won more advantageously than when selected.

  FIG. 12B shows the coin acquisition specifications when “Easy Start” is selected. For example, when a bonus (any one of BB and RB) is won, one coin of gold, silver and copper is awarded with a probability of 25%. In addition, at the time of cherry winning (specifically, at the time of winning), one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded with a probability of 50%. Also, every 2000 games, one of gold, silver and copper coins is awarded with a probability of 50%. However, as the number of games increases, the probability that a good color coin (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) is given is increased.

  Also, when the mission is completed, coins are awarded 50% of the time depending on the level of the accomplished mission. For example, one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded at the completion of a level high mission. In addition, any two gold, silver or copper coins will be awarded when the mission during the level is achieved, and any one gold, silver or copper coin may be awarded when the level low mission is achieved. Be done. In addition to the acquisition of coins during such a game, the details will be described later, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  Furthermore, when a mission with a high level and a medium level is achieved, coins to be awarded are added on condition that there are stock coins to be described later. In this case, for example, any two coins of gold, silver and copper are additionally awarded when the mission of level high is achieved, and any of gold, silver and copper coins are awarded when the mission during level is achieved. One additional card is awarded.

  When a coin is awarded to the player, the acquired data (data indicating the number of coins acquired of gold, silver, and copper acquired) stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b is updated according to the content. Be done.

  Further, in this embodiment, an effect to be executed on the condition that the level is a certain level or more, the cumulative number of games, the cumulative number of bonus times, or the like is a certain number or more is prepared. A mission to be achieved by executing an effect that does not appear unless the level above the certain level, the cumulative number of games, the cumulative number of bonus times, etc. is above a certain number is defined, and the player plays a game. The motivation to raise the risk can also be effectively enhanced.

  Further, in the game when a password described later is input at the start of the game, the sub CPU 91a sequentially advances the stages of the stories displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 according to the number of games. Specifically, depending on the number of games, when the story reaches a certain stage, the next stage will be developed.

  Further, when a password described later at the start of the game is input at the start of the game, when the anniversary specified from the input password indicates a specific anniversary, the anniversary date (amber date effect) For example, when a player's birthday is specified, it is possible to execute an effect to bless the player or the like by satisfying a certain condition.

  Further, not only the value of the level increased in one slot machine 1 but also the value increased in the other slot machine 1 can be taken over. In addition to the value of the level, when the player changes the effect setting in the stage of a story progressed in another slot machine 1 or in another slot machine 1, it is possible to take over the setting contents.

  Specifically, the player selects “Enter password” from the main menu screen shown in FIG. 13A, and enters a password issued by the management server 1200 in advance, according to the previous game history. It is possible to play the game by inheriting the game level and the effect setting (including the stage of the story).

  The password (key data), which will be described in detail later, specifies an anniversary, level, model information, latest information, and other effect settings according to the gaming history of the individual player managed by the management server 1200 described later. Character data consisting of eight possible characters.

  The main menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 when the effect switch 56 (CHANCE button) is operated in the control state until the bet number is set after the game is over (after the setting change) Be done.

  While the main menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the stop switch 8L is operated to move to the menu item on the left side and the stop switch 8R is operated. Move to the right menu item. Then, when the effect switch 56 is operated, the menu item displayed on the front side is selected. Further, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the effect switch 56 is operated or the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined period of time or longer while "end" is displayed on the front side as a menu item. An end confirmation screen on which "YES" or "NO" can be selected is displayed. By operating the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 on this end confirmation screen and selecting "YES" between "YES" and "NO", the basic screen (normally before the transition to the main menu screen is made. To return to the screen). Also, when no operation is performed for a predetermined time for each screen, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, on the main menu screen before entering the password or before starting the game by the easy start described later, "Easy start", "Enter password", "Member registration", "Stock coin hint" , "End" menu items are displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14D, the player operates the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 on the main menu screen in this case to select the “stock coin hint”. You can display a stock coin hint screen like this. The stock coin is a coin (three types of gold, silver, and copper) which is added and accumulated when a predetermined condition is established in the game in the slot machine 1 regardless of whether or not the password is input. Data indicating stock coins (stock coin data) is stored in a stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91 b.

  The stock specification of this stock coin is shown in FIG. 12 (c). For example, when a bonus (any one of BB and RB) is won, one of gold, silver and copper coins is stocked with 100% probability. Also, every 100 games, one of gold, silver and copper coins is stocked with a probability of 20%.

  When a coin is newly stocked, stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91 b is updated according to the content.

  The sub CPU 91a refers to stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area when the "stock coin hint" is selected by the player, and in accordance with the state of the coin stored in FIG. a) Any one of the hint screens shown in (a) to (d) is selected and displayed. In this case, for example, when the screen of (a) is displayed in FIG. 14, it is suggested that the value of the stored coin is not high, and is stored when the screen of (d) is displayed. It is suggested that the value of the coin is very high (for example, the number of gold coins is a predetermined number or more).

  The stock coin is awarded to the player when predetermined conditions are satisfied at the end of the game. Thus, by displaying the screen as a hint of stock coins in this way, the player can predict how much stock coin is accumulated before entering the password, and more stock coins are generated. It becomes possible to target and select the accumulated gaming machines, and the interest can be improved.

  The stock coin data is reset at a predetermined timing. In this embodiment, it is reset when the slot machine 1 is powered on and when a predetermined time (for example, 20 hours) has elapsed since the power was on. In the resetting, the stock coin storage area is cleared, and one stock coin data is randomly selected from among a plurality of stock coin data having different value contents (that is, different combinations of gold, silver, and copper). And store the determined stock coin data in the stock coin storage area.

  The sub CPU 91a sets the value of stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area when the "stock coin hint" is selected by the player within a predetermined time (for example, one hour) after the above-mentioned reset. Regardless of the content, a predetermined one of the screens shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 14 is displayed. By doing this, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether stock coin data has been reset or not, and the interest can be improved.

  Subsequently, specifications for input operation of a password will be described. When the player operates the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 to select the password menu before entering the password or on the main menu screen before starting the game by a simple start, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. The password input screen shown in (b) is displayed. On the password input screen, as shown in FIG. 15C, the characters are moved by operating the stop switches 8L and 8R, and as shown in FIG. 16A, the effect switch 56 (CHANCE button) is moved. By operation, the character displayed on the front is selected.

  Here, each time one character is selected, the next character can be selected. In addition, by operating the effect switch 56 in the state that "one character back" is displayed on the front, the character on the front can be selected again. Then, when an 8-character password is selected, the screen moves to "OK", and as shown in FIG. 16B, the effect switch 56 is operated in a state where characters other than "Return one character" are displayed on the front side. To complete the password input.

  If the input password is authenticated as a normal password, as shown in FIG. 16C, a “Password OK” screen is displayed indicating that the input of the password has been accepted. The password OK screen is closed when the effect switch 56 is operated or when a predetermined time elapses, and the screen is switched to the basic screen. If the password is not authenticated as a legitimate password, a “password NG” screen (not shown) is displayed indicating that the password input has not been accepted. The password NG screen is also closed when the effect switch 56 is operated or a predetermined time elapses, and the screen is switched to the basic screen.

  When the password is authenticated as a legitimate password, the value of the personal history storage area (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, history of achieved missions) allocated to the RAM 91b is initialized and analyzed from the password In the anniversary storage area assigned to the RAM 91b, the anniversary date to be stored is identified in the level storage area assigned to the RAM 91b, and the model information for identifying the model analyzed from the password is stored. The latest information indicating the latest game history analyzed from the password is stored in the model information storage area allocated to the RAM 91b, and the other effect settings 1 to 3 analyzed from the password are stored in the latest information storage area allocated to the RAM 91b. , And are set in the effect setting storage area allocated to the RAM 91b. Then, along with the above setting, the level according to the previous game history and the effect setting are handed over to the slot machine 1. At this time, the input password itself is stored in the password storage area allocated to the RAM 91b.

  Next, the analysis procedure of the input password will be described. In the ROM 91c, as shown in FIG. 17A, a password analysis table in which numerical values of 0 to 31 are determined in advance corresponding to characters (32 Roman characters: 26 types, 6 types of symbols) constituting a password is set in advance. It is memorized. As shown in FIG. 17B, the sub CPU 91a refers to the password analysis table and replaces the input password with the corresponding numerical value. For example, if the password is “KZFJC = U *” as shown in FIG. 17 (b), “10-25-5-9-2-26-20- according to the password analysis table shown in FIG. 17 (a). Replaced with "30". Next, the replaced numerical value is converted into a binary number, and a 4-bit value in total including upper 2 bits and lower 2 bits is specified as a random value (a random value obtained at the time of password issuance by the management server 1200) and a random value Shift the value of 36 bits except for the right value by the random value. For example, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the random value is 0110 (= 6), the 36-bit value excluding the random value is shifted to the right by 6 bits. At this time, the value overflowed to the right shifts to the upper bit.

  Next, a hash value (a random number assigned to the management server 1200 to make the password variable) from the 36-bit value after the shift, and in this embodiment, the lower order of the 36 bits excluding the random value is used. Except for the fourth bit, the lower 8 bit, the lower 16 bit, the lower 23 bit, the lower 28 bit, the lower 33 bit), and the anniversary date from the obtained 30 bit value Analyze levels, model information, immediate information and other staging settings.

  Of the 30-bit value, the lower 3 bits indicate the anniversary, the lower 4 bits to the lower 11 bits indicate the level, and the lower 12 bits to the lower 24 bits indicate the effect settings 1 to 3, Five bits, four bits, and four bits are allocated, respectively. Further, the lower 25 bits to the lower 27 bits indicate the latest information, and the lower 28 bits to the lower 30 bits indicate model information. Anniversary, level, model information, latest information and other effect settings specified from these values are set as anniversary storage area, level storage area, model information storage area, latest information storage area, effect setting storage area, respectively It will be done.

  Further, the lower 25 bits of the first bit in the latest information indicates whether or not the previous game number is 700 G or less, and is “1” in the case of 700 G or less. The lower 26 bits of the second bit in the latest information indicates whether or not the previous BB count is 10 or more, and is "1" in the case of 10 or more. Of the latest information, the lower 27 bits of the third bit indicate whether or not one or more months have passed since the previous game, and is set to "1" when one or more months have passed.

  The model information is, for example, information indicating the classification of the series of models, the name of the models, and the specifications of the models.

  Further, as described above, the personal history storage area is allocated to the RAM 91b, and a game history (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs) after password input and authentication as a legitimate password is accumulated. It has become so. Furthermore, when the mission (problem) set in the slot machine 1 is achieved in advance, the history of achieved missions indicating the type of the achieved mission is also accumulated. In addition, as described above, for 10 experience points, the level stored in the level storage area is increased by one each time 10 experience points are obtained.

  Then, when the player finishes the game, the player's game history, current level, experience value, number of earned coins, effect setting (not including model information and latest information), history of achieved missions, etc. A two-dimensional code including game information (game result information) is output from the slot machine 1 and acquired using the portable terminal 1100, and the management server 1200 is provided with game result information included in the two-dimensional code. Can be reflected in the contents of the player database.

  Note that when “Easy Start” is selected on the main menu screen by the player, unlike in the case where the password is input, the player can not take over the previous game history to play a game. Game history, current level, experience points, number of earned coins, effect settings (not including model information and latest information), history of achievement missions, etc. after selecting 'Easy Start' and until the end of the game 2 The dimensional code can be output from the slot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, on the main menu screen after password input or after the start of the game by easy start, the menu items of "data clear", "2D code creation", "today's result" and "end" Is to be displayed. For example, when "data clear" is selected by the player on the main menu screen in this case, a password storage area, an personal history storage area, an experience value storage area, an anniversary storage area, and the like allocated to the RAM 91b. Each of the level storage area, model information storage area, latest information storage area, effect setting storage area, and acquired coin storage area is cleared.

  Further, when the "today's result" is selected on the main menu screen shown in FIG. 13B by the player, the game history from the password entry or after the start of the game by the easy start to the current time, the current The level, experience points, contents of earned coins, history of achieved missions, etc. are displayed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when the “two-dimensional code creation” is selected by the player on the main menu screen, the sub CPU 91a generates a two-dimensional code, and FIG. 19 (b) The generated two-dimensional code is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as shown in FIG. In the two-dimensional code displayed here, for example, if it is a game in which a password has been input, a URL indicating a location of a normal update page on the management server 1200 (a URL for normal update, as shown in FIG. ), A password input at the start of the game, a game random number (in this embodiment, a 32-bit random number) which is a random value acquired each time a two-dimensional code is created, gaming history update data, and acquisition data And information respectively indicating. Here, the gaming history update data and the acquisition data constitute gaming result information.

  In the game history update data, each data value (total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, history of achieved missions) stored in the personal history storage area, level value stored in the level storage area, experience value storage The experience value stored in the area, the effect settings 1 to 3 stored in the effect setting storage area, and the like are stored.

  Further, the acquired data indicates the same content as the acquired data (data indicating the number of acquired gold, silver, and copper coins) stored in the acquired coin storage area.

  Here, in the two-dimensional code, the total number of games (0 to 9999 games) is 14 bits, the number of BBs (0 to 127) is 7 bits, the number of RBs (0 to 63) is 6 bits, The value (0 to 199) is 8 bits, the experience value (0 to 999) is 10 bits, and the effect settings 1 to 3 (each 0 to 99) are 7 bits (7 × 3 = total) 21 bits), 100 bits are used for the type of achievement mission (100 types). Therefore, a total of 166 bits are used for the game history update data.

  On the other hand, 4 bits (4 x 3 = 12 bits in total) are used for the acquired data (the number of gold coins, the number of silver coins, and the number of copper coins (each 0 to 15)). 12 bits are used for.

  As described above, unlike the game history update data used for outputting the game history, the acquisition data used for giving benefits such as items can be handled with only the data amount of information related to giving benefits, so the two-dimensional code The proportion can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the experience value stored in the experience value storage area is the experience value (i.e., 0 to 9) of the remaining fraction used for upgrading.

  Then, the two-dimensional code is read by the portable terminal 1100, and by accessing the URL of the management server 1200 specified from the two-dimensional code, the content specified from the two-dimensional code is the content of the player database included in the management server 1200 Is reflected in the

  As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the output of the two-dimensional code may be obtained without presentation, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the stock coin may be obtained as shown in FIG. There is a case that is output along with the JACKPOT effect showing the lottery effect. Details of the JACKPOT effect will be described later.

  Between the time when the password is authenticated and the time when the two-dimensional code is displayed, entry of a new password is prohibited. Then, a two-dimensional code is displayed, and the password storage area, the personal history storage area, the experience value storage area, the anniversary storage area, the level storage area allocated to the RAM 91b when switching to the basic screen by the operation of the effect switch 56 Each of the area, the model information storage area, the latest information storage area, the effect setting storage area, and the acquired coin storage area is cleared, and the input of the password is permitted again.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, by inputting the password when starting the game, the past game history such as the level when performing the previous game and the effect setting are reflected ) It is possible to execute an effect, and it is possible to perform an effect with continuity over a long period of time. In addition, since the password is included in the two-dimensional code including the game result information after the game is over, the password is issued by authenticating the password included in the two-dimensional code at the management server 1200 that issues the password. It is possible to determine whether or not the player is the player who has received the game. Therefore, even if a third party obtains another person's password and plays a game to acquire a two-dimensional code or acquires another person's two-dimensional code, the game result information included in this two-dimensional code is managed It can not be reflected in a player database described later included in the server 1200. As a result, there is no point in using or stealing a password or a two-dimensional code, and therefore it is possible to prevent the password and the two-dimensional code from being used or stolen.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, the password issued by the management server 1200 changes with a random value that changes each time it is issued, so the same password will be used even when the game history of the same content is specified Instead, it becomes difficult to guess the password.

  In this embodiment, in order to receive issuance of a password from the management server 1200, the management server 1200 is accessed using the portable terminal 1100 in advance, member registration is performed, and the terminal identification information (SIM of the portable terminal 1100) is received. It is necessary to register data). In this embodiment, when “membership registration” is selected on the main menu screen shown in FIG. 13A by the player, the sub CPU 91a identifies the URL indicating the location of the member registration page of the management server 1200. A two-dimensional code (see FIG. 20A) is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The player can easily access the member registration page of the management server 1200 by reading the two-dimensional code on the portable terminal 1100.

  FIG. 50A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display unit 140 when the portable terminal 1100 reads a two-dimensional code. As described above, in a state in which the image is in focus by the autofocus, an image of the two-dimensional code is displayed on the portable terminal 1100 in a state in which the photographed two-dimensional code is displayed within a frame in the display screen. Incorporated into Then, the read two-dimensional code is analyzed by a general two-dimensional code reading application program included in the portable terminal 1100.

  FIG. 50B is a diagram showing a state in which the URL as the analysis result of the two-dimensional code is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100. Thus, a URL indicating the location of a predetermined web page such as a member registration page of the management server 1200 is displayed on the display unit 140. Then, by selecting this URL, it is possible to access a predetermined web page of the management server 1200 indicated by this URL.

  Further, in this embodiment, even a player who has not registered the management server 1200 in advance and who has not been registered as a member can select the game history by selecting the above-mentioned "Easy Start" on the main menu screen. It is possible to start a game using the function to accumulate. However, in this case, as a matter of course, it is not possible to carry out the game by inheriting the previous game history.

  After selecting "Easy Start" and starting the game, the two-dimensional code displayed when ending the game is different from the case where the password is input and started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), a configuration that includes a URL indicating the location of a page for easy start on the management server instead of the normal update URL, and does not include a password It has become. Other information is the same as the two-dimensional code based on the game for which the password has been input.

  Then, the player reads this two-dimensional code by the portable terminal 1100, and accesses the URL of the management server 1200 specified from the read two-dimensional code. The management server 1200 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the accessed portable terminal has already been registered. When the terminal identification information of the accessed portable terminal is not registered, the management server 1200 describes the player information (details will be described later) for the player associated with the terminal identification information, which will be described later. The game result information included in the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine 1 is reflected in the newly added player information registered in the database.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information of the accessed portable terminal is already registered, the management server 1200 is included in the two-dimensional code in the player information associated with the terminal identification information in the player database. Reflect the game result information.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the player accumulates the game history only by selecting “Easy Start” on the main menu screen, regardless of whether or not the member is registered. A game using a function can be started.

  After the sub CPU 91a of this embodiment displays the various menu screens transitioning from the main menu screen as described above, if no operation is performed by the player, the basic screen is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed. It is supposed to switch.

  Further, in the sub CPU 91a, when a password is input by the player or “Easy start” is selected, an effect different from the effect mode (normal effect mode) when these operations are not performed. The control state is changed to a specific effect mode which is an aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are allocated to a part of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, and in the normal effect mode, as shown in FIG. Only regular patterns are displayed on the specific effect areas 51a and 51b.

  On the other hand, when it is controlled to the specific effect mode, as shown in FIG. 18B, a character based on the effect setting set by the player is displayed in the specific effect area 51a, and the specific effect area is displayed. An experience value meter indicating the level value of the player (the level value specified from the password) and the experience value required to increase the next level is displayed on 51b. In addition, the target displayed in the specific effect area 51a, 51b in the specific effect mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the achievement status of the mission may be displayed.

  However, in the specific effect mode by the selection of “easy start”, since the effect setting, the level value, etc. can not be specified, the character based on the default effect setting is used in the specific effect area 51 a instead of the effect setting set by the player. The level value and the experience value meter are displayed in the specific effect area 51b also based on the default value (for example, 0 for the level value, 0 for the experience value meter).

  Further, the sub CPU 91a erases the specific effect areas 51a and 51b when the stop switch 8C is operated for a predetermined time or longer in a state where the basic screen is displayed regardless of whether the normal effect mode or the specific effect mode. In the default setting, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed, and a game start operation (a password input or "easy start" selection) according to the present system is made or a game is performed. When the ending operation (selection of "data clear" and "two-dimensional code creation") is performed, the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are displayed again even if the specific effect areas 51a and 51b have been deleted. Ru.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the specific effect mode and the normal effect mode, the display modes in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are the same, and the same effect is performed. For example, regardless of the effect mode, an effect of raining in the background is performed, which suggests the result of the internal lottery and the like.

  As described above, although the display modes in the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are the same, in the specific effect mode, for example, the display contents of the specific effect areas 51a and 51b are selected according to the winning expectation of the special part. It is also possible to produce an effect that changes.

  As described above, since the display modes of the areas other than the specific effect areas 51a and 51b can be made common to the specific effect mode and the normal effect mode, the capacity of the image data and the moving image data to be used can be suppressed.

  The game history displayed in the specific effect area 51b of the liquid crystal display 51 is not limited to the level value and the experience value as described above, but the cumulative game number and the cumulative bonus count, and the execution condition of the effect described above It is also possible to display the level value which becomes the number of games, the cumulative game number, the remaining value up to the cumulative bonus number, and the like.

  Subsequently, a management server 1200 to which the management apparatus of the present invention is applied will be described. As described above, the management server 1200 is configured to include hardware equivalent to a general server computer, and can perform data communication with the portable terminal 1100 via the Internet network 900. The management server 1200 performs registration and update of game information corresponding to the player, issuance of a password, provision of a privilege, and the like according to the contents of access request from the portable terminal 1100. In this embodiment, the management server 1200 can be accessed only from the portable terminal to which the terminal identification information (SIM data) is attached, and the portable terminal or terminal identification to which the terminal identification information is not attached Although information is added, access from a portable terminal that has refused to transmit terminal identification information is denied.

  The management server 1200 has a player database for managing game information of the player, a game history database for managing a history of game results for each game of the player, and benefit data to be given to the player. And a benefit database for managing information.

  In the player database, as shown in FIG. 22A, terminal identification information (SIM data) capable of identifying the portable terminal 1100 owned by the player, current status (standby / playing), password (last Issues), total number of games to date, total number of BBs, total number of RBs, current level, (fractional) experience value, earned coins (number of each coin of gold, silver and copper), points, Player information consisting of points, setting contents of effect settings 1 to 3 and achievement status by mission (achieved mission is 1, mission not achieved is 0), etc., by player (by terminal identification information) It is registered. The player information also includes personal information (member information) of players such as player name (registered name), gender, date of birth, prefectures, etc. (not shown). .

  In the gaming history database, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), terminal identification information (SIM data) capable of identifying the portable terminal 1100 owned by the player who played the game, the gaming date and time, and the slot machine 1 at the start of the gaming. The password input to the game random number randomly acquired by the slot machine 1 at the end of the game, the number of games in the game, the number of BBs in the game, the number of RBs in the game, the end of the game Level value at the time, experience value (of fractions) at the end of the game, the number of gold, silver and copper coins earned in the game, setting contents of effect settings 1 to 3 at the end of the game, Game history information including the achievement status by mission in the game is registered.

  In the benefit database, as shown in FIG. 22C, storage locations of benefit data (content data, or a two-dimensional code indicating an exchange ticket or an application ticket, etc.) corresponding to the benefit ID capable of identifying the benefit. There is registered benefit data information including the type of benefit data, the type of conditions for giving benefits, the condition value of the corresponding type, and the like. As types of conditions, coins, points, points (details will be described later), levels, mission achievement rates, number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, etc. can be set, and the condition value (coin Type and number, points, points, etc.) can be set.

  Next, timer interrupt processing (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 at intervals of 1.12 seconds based on the count value of the internal clock will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the timer interrupt process (sub), first, the register in use is saved in the stack area (step S4001).

  Next, a power failure determination process is performed (step S4002). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input from the power failure detection circuit 98, and if the voltage drop signal is input, the voltage drop signal is also input in the previous power failure determination process. If a voltage drop signal is input even in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power failure flag indicating that is set.

  After the power failure determination process in the step S4002, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S4003). If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to the power failure process (sub). In the power-off process (sub), a process of storing the above-described destruction diagnostic data, RAM parity adjustment data, and the like in the RAM 91 c is executed.

  If the power-off flag is not set, command analysis processing is executed (step S4004). In command analysis processing, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the command buffer, and if the command is stored in the command buffer, the command is acquired from the command buffer. Then, the processing corresponding to the acquired command is executed. After the command analysis processing is completed, the main menu display processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (step S4005).

  In the main menu display process, a process of displaying a main menu corresponding to the presence or absence of a password input is executed. After execution of the main menu display process, the main menu operation process before password input shown in FIG. 25 is executed (step S4006).

  Before Password Input In the main menu operation processing, processing relating to an operation performed on each menu displayed before password input is executed. Before the password input, after the main menu operation processing, level and coin related processing is executed (step S4007).

  In the level / coin related process, a process related to experience value and level up, which will be described later, and a process related to giving coins (three types of gold, silver, and copper) that become the right to receive an item are executed. After the level and coin related processing, after entering the password, the main menu operation processing is executed (step S4008).

  In the main menu operation processing after password input, processing for displaying the main menu when the portable terminal 1100 is detected by the photoelectric sensor 57 and processing related to operations performed on each menu displayed after password input are executed. . After entering the password After the main menu operation processing, the special effect execution processing is executed (step S4009).

  In the special effect execution process, a process for executing the special effect is performed when the photoelectric sensor 57 detects the action of the player during the game.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a executes a predetermined effect process that performs a process of determining the presence / absence and type of the predetermined effect and a process of executing the predetermined effect (step S4010). In this embodiment, the term "predetermined effect" indicates an advantageous possibility that indicates whether or not the advantageous gaming state is controlled as the effect result (in this example, whether or not the bonus is internally won). It is an effect of informing a result giving suggestion result indicating that a result or a benefit has been given (in this example, having obtained a coin) after executing the effect of the common mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, as a predetermined effect, an effect in which the ball rotates the roulette is executed. Further, the predetermined effect is started at the timing of starting a new game, and the effect result is stopped and displayed at the timing immediately before the stop operation of each reel becomes possible.

  Next, when the sub CPU 91a ends the predetermined effect processing, the sub CPU 91a ends the timer interrupt processing (sub).

  Although not shown, in the timer interrupt process (sub), a process for executing a bonus game or a normal game is also performed.

  Next, the contents of each process executed in accordance with the operation through the main menu screen of the player will be described in detail.

  FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing a procedure of main menu display processing (processing of S4005 of timer interrupt processing (sub) shown in FIG. 23) executed by the slot machine 1. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current gaming state is between the end of the game (after the change of setting) and the setting of the number of bets (step S2201). If it is determined that the state is not this state (step S2201: NO), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is between the end of the game and the setting of the bet number (step S2201; YES), the sub CPU 91a determines whether the current control state is the specific effect mode. (Step S2202).

  When not in the special effect mode, that is, in the normal effect mode (step S2202; NO), the sub CPU 91a displays the main menu screen with the liquid crystal before the password input (before the "Easy Start" is selected) as shown in FIG. The display control circuit 92 is controlled to display on the display unit 51. Thereby, the main menu screen before password input is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2203). Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is the specific effect mode (step S2202: YES), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the photoelectric sensor 57 (step S2204).

  When there is no input of the detection signal from the photoelectric sensor 57 (step S2204; NO), the process to be performed is returned to the process of the caller of this process. If there is an input of a detection signal from the photoelectric sensor 57 (step S2204; YES), it is determined whether the input level of the detection signal is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (step S2205). That is, by determining whether the light amount of the reflected light received by the light receiving element 57 b of the photoelectric sensor 57 is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, it is determined whether the irradiation light of the light emitting element 57 a is reflected by the portable terminal 1100. .

  If the input level of the detection signal is not equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S2205; NO), the process to be performed is returned to the process of the caller of this process. If the input level of the detection signal is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S2205; YES), notification at the time of detection of the portable terminal indicating that the portable terminal has been detected is performed (step S2206).

  The notification is performed, for example, by displaying a message or an image from the liquid crystal display 51 (counting down the time until the main menu is displayed, etc.), outputting sound from the speakers 53, 54, or the like.

  After notification at the time of detection of a portable terminal, the sub CPU 91a performs display control so that the main menu screen after password input (after selecting "Easy Start") as shown in FIG. 13B is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The circuit 92 is controlled. As a result, the main menu screen after password input is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2207). Thereafter, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  Conventionally, it was necessary to perform an operation for displaying a main menu screen and then perform an operation for displaying a two-dimensional code, but in this embodiment, when a portable terminal 1100 is detected, it is automatically performed. Since the main menu screen is displayed, it is possible to save time and effort when acquiring the two-dimensional code using the portable terminal 1100, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance felt by the player when acquiring the two-dimensional code.

  Further, since notification that the mobile terminal 1100 has been detected is made, the player can confirm that the mobile terminal has been detected, and the two-dimensional code can be acquired with certainty.

  Further, since the main menu screen is displayed when the portable terminal 1100 is detected, it is possible to reliably determine whether to display the main menu screen.

  In addition, it is also possible to apply the present invention to a gaming machine that displays a main menu when a predetermined switch is operated after notifying when a portable terminal is detected.

  In addition, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that displays a standard (for example, a guideline, a small character, etc.) for bringing the portable terminal 1100 close to a specific area from the liquid crystal display 51.

  Also, in this embodiment, an example will be described in which the main menu screen is automatically displayed when the portable terminal 1100 is detected. However, when the portable terminal 1100 is detected, the two-dimensional code is automatically displayed directly It is also possible.

  FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing a procedure of main menu operation processing before password input (processing of S4006 of timer interrupt processing (sub) shown in FIG. 23) executed in the slot machine 1. This process is started by the player performing a menu item selection operation by the player on the main menu screen (see FIG. 13A) before password input (or before “Easy Start” selection). .

  When the "stock coin hint" is selected by the player (step S2301; YES), the sub CPU 91a refers to stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area and responds to the situation of the coin stored. Then, one of the hint screens shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 14 is selected and displayed (step S2302). However, as described above, when the predetermined time (for example, one hour) has not elapsed since the stock coin data was reset, (a) to (d) of FIG. A predetermined screen (for example, the screen shown in FIG. 14C) of the hint screens shown in d) is displayed. As a result, the player can predict how much stock coin is accumulated in the slot machine 1. When the effect switch 56 is operated while the hint screen is displayed, the screen returns to the main menu screen. When the state where no operation is performed continues for a predetermined time while the hint screen is displayed, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  Alternatively, when “member registration” is selected by the player (step S2303; YES), the sub CPU 91a is a two-dimensional code in which the URL indicating the location of the member registration page of the management server 1200 is specified (FIG. Is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2304). The player operates the portable terminal 1100 to cause the displayed two-dimensional code to be captured and taken into the interior of the portable terminal 1100 (saves the two-dimensional code image in the storage unit 120 (see FIG. 2)). it can. If the effect switch 56 is operated or a state in which no operation is performed continues for a predetermined time while the two-dimensional code is displayed, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  Alternatively, if the player selects "Easy Start" (Step S2305; YES), the sub CPU 91a closes the main menu screen and causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the basic screen, and from the normal effect mode The control state is changed to the specific effect mode (step S2306). Further, in this case, the sub CPU 91a also sets a specific effect mode flag indicating that control has been made to the specific effect mode. Further, the sub CPU 91a displays a character based on the default effect setting in the specific effect area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, and displays a level value and an experience value meter based on the default value in the specific effect area 51b ( For example, 0 for level value, 0 level for experience value meter).

  Alternatively, if “enter password” is selected by the player (step S2307; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a password input acceptance process (step S2308).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the password input acceptance process. First, the sub CPU 91 a controls the display control circuit 92 to display the password input screen on the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, a password input screen (see FIG. 15B) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2401).

  The player operates the stop switches 8L and 8R and the effect switch 56 while viewing the password issued from the management server 1200, which is displayed on the display screen of the portable terminal 1100 (see FIG. 50F). Enter the password on the password entry screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), when the player performs the operation of determining the password on the password input screen (step S2402; YES), the sub CPU 91a performs the process as described above (see FIG. 17). And the input password is analyzed (step S2403).

  As a result of the analysis, if the input password is not a valid password (step S2404; NO), the sub CPU 91a displays the password NG screen (not shown) indicating that the input of the password is not received. It is displayed on the screen 51 (step S2405). When the effect switch 56 is operated or a predetermined time passes while the password NG screen is displayed, the screen switches to the basic screen.

  On the other hand, if the entered password is a legitimate password (step S2404; YES) but the model information included in the password indicates a model different from that of the slot machine 1 (step S2406; YES), the sub The CPU 91a controls the liquid crystal display 51 to perform an effect of displaying that it is a different model (step S2407). As a result, as shown in FIG. 27, an effect screen in which the character is speaking is displayed on the specific effect area 51 a of the liquid crystal display 51 that a password of a different model has been input.

  This effect screen switches to the basic screen (see FIG. 18A) in the normal effect mode when a predetermined time has elapsed. That is, when a password of a different model is input, although the input of the password is accepted, the game can not be started using the function of accumulating the gaming history without shifting to the specific effect mode.

  On the other hand, if it is not a different model (step S2406; NO), the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display a password OK screen (see FIG. 16C) (step S2408). When the effect switch 56 is operated or a predetermined time elapses while the password OK screen is displayed, the screen is switched to the basic screen.

  When switching from the password OK screen to the basic screen, the sub CPU 91a sets the level, the effect setting, and the like based on the analysis result of the password (step S2409). The sub CPU 91a also stores the input password in the password storage area allocated to the RAM 91b. Further, the sub CPU 91a changes the control state from the normal effect mode to the specific effect mode (step S2410). Further, in this case, the sub CPU 91a also sets a specific effect mode flag indicating that control has been made to the specific effect mode. Further, the sub CPU 91a also sets a password input flag indicating that the game is started when the password is input. The setting of the level and effect setting and the transition to the specific effect mode may be performed at the timing when the password OK screen is displayed.

  Along with the above setting, the slot machine 1 takes over the level and the effect setting according to the previous game history. Further, by shifting to the specific effect mode, the player can start playing a game using the function of accumulating the game history.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a checks a flag indicating whether or not one month or more has passed since the previous game, which is indicated by the third bit among the latest information included in the password, and the flag is the last game It is judged whether it is "1" which shows that 1 month or more has passed since (step S2411).

  As a result, when it is indicated that one month or more has passed since the previous game (step S2411; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes an effect indicating that (step S2413). For example, since the game has not been played recently, an effect screen in which the character is talking that he wants to play a large number of games is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 this time.

On the other hand, when it is not shown that one month or more has passed since the previous game (step S 2411; NO), the sub CPU 91 a suggests the previous game according to the value of the flag derived by the analysis of the password. The effect (previous game suggestion effect) is executed (step S2412). More specifically, the sub CPU 91a sets the value of a flag indicating whether the number of previous games is 700 games or less, which is indicated by the first bit of the latest information included in the password, or the second bit. According to the value of the flag indicating whether or not the previous BB count is 10 or more, the previous game suggestion effect is executed. For example, the sub CPU 91a executes effects by displaying such as "You have had 10 or more bonus times last time. It's amazing." Or "You've been around for a long time now. The liquid crystal display 51 is controlled.

  Returning to the main menu operation process before password input shown in FIG. 25, after the password input acceptance process is finished, the sub CPU 91a executes effect setting process (S2309). In the effect setting process, the main menu screen is switched to an effect setting screen (not shown), and the effect setting screen is displayed. The player sets one of a plurality of types of effects displayed on the effect setting screen (for example, a character is selected from a plurality of types). The setting of the effect is performed, for example, by pressing the stop switch to make a selection, and pressing the effect switch 56 to determine the selected effect. When the effect switch 56 is pressed or no operation is performed for a predetermined time while the effect setting screen is displayed, the screen returns to the basic screen.

  If the player selects "end" (step S2310; YES), the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display an end confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 13C (step S2311). Here, when an operation to select “YES” is performed by the player or when a predetermined time has elapsed, the screen is switched to the basic screen. Alternatively, when the player performs an operation to select “NO”, the screen returns to the main menu screen (see FIG. 13A).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the level / coin related process (the process of S4007 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23) executed by the slot machine 1. This process is executed for each game of one game. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the current control state is the specific effect mode (step S2601). As a result, when it is determined that it is not the specific effect mode (step S2601; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2614. In addition, specifically, it can be determined by confirming whether the specific effect mode flag is set or not.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the specific effect mode (step S2601; YES), that is, if the game is started by inputting the password or if the "easy start" is selected to start the game, The sub CPU 91a determines whether a predetermined achievement condition such as the condition shown in FIG. 11 is satisfied (step S2602). As a result, when the achievement condition is not satisfied (step S2602; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2607.

  On the other hand, if the achievement condition is satisfied (step S2602; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the experience point and the history of achievement missions according to the achievement condition (step S2603). The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the updated experience value has become equal to or more than a predetermined value (10 experience value in this embodiment regardless of the level in this embodiment) (step S2604). As a result, if the experience value is not equal to or more than the predetermined value (step S2604; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2607.

  On the other hand, if the experience value exceeds the predetermined value (step S2604; YES), the sub CPU 91a raises the level as much as possible (increases the level value) based on the experience value (step S2605). Then, the sub CPU 91a subtracts the value of the level that has been increased from the experience value (step S2606). For example, if the level is increased by 2, 20 experience points (10 experience points × 2) are subtracted.

  In step S2607, the sub CPU 91a updates the other game history (the total number of games, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, etc.). Next, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the coin acquisition condition (see FIGS. 12A and 12B) as described above is satisfied (step S2608). As a result, if the acquisition condition is not satisfied (step S2608; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2614.

  On the other hand, when the acquisition condition is satisfied (step S2608; YES), the sub CPU 91a confirms whether or not the game is started when the password is input (step S2608A). In addition, it can be specifically judged by checking whether a password input flag is set whether the case where a password is input and a game is started is confirmed. If the password is input and the game is started, the sub CPU 91a selects the coin determination table for password input as the coin determination table for determining the presence or absence of coin acquisition (step S2608B). On the other hand, when the password is input and the game is started (ie, when "Easy Start" is selected), sub CPU 91a is used as a coin determination table for determining the presence or absence of coin acquisition. , And select a coin determination table for password non-input time (step S2608C).

  Then, the sub CPU 91a performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the coin determination table selected in steps S2608B and S2608C, and executes a lottery process according to the established condition (step S2609). In this case, if the password is input and the game is started, coins are awarded according to the acquisition probability shown in FIG. 12A using the coin determination table for password input selected in step S2608B. Then it is decided. On the other hand, if "easy start" is selected and the game is started, the coin determination table for non-input password selected in step S2608C is used according to the acquisition probability shown in FIG. 12 (b) It is decided to give a coin.

  As a result of the lottery process of step S2610, when the lottery is not won (step S2610; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2614. On the other hand, when the lottery is won (step S2610; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the acquired data stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b according to the winning result (the type and the number of coins). Step S2611).

  In addition, when the achieved acquisition condition is mission achievement of high level and medium level and there is stock coin (one coin of any kind is sufficient), as described above, coin is additionally awarded. Ru. At that time, the sub-CPU 91a subtracts the additionally granted coin from the stock coin. However, if there are no additional coins of the same type as the added coin in the stock coin, the number of coins of that type in the stock coin is set to 0 (0 in the case of 0 originally). It will be left as it is.).

  In step S2614, the sub CPU 91a determines whether stock conditions (see FIG. 12C) for adding (stocking) stock coins are satisfied. As a result, when the stock condition is not satisfied (step S2614; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2616. On the other hand, if the stock condition is satisfied (step S2614; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a lottery process (stock lottery process) for stocking coins (step S2615).

  In this embodiment, as described above, the stock lottery process is executed on the condition that the bonus is won or 100 games are consumed (except for the game in the bonus state). In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the winning probability is set to 20% when 100 games are consumed as a condition, but the winning probability may be changed according to the contents of the current stock coin. . For example, when the total number of coins in stock coin is 15 or less, the winning probability may be higher than in the case of 16 or more.

  As a result of the stock lottery process, when the lottery is not won (step S2616; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2616. On the other hand, if the lottery is won (step S2616; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b according to the winning result (type and number of coins). (Step S2617).

  In step S2618, the sub CPU 91a determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 20 hours) has elapsed since the slot machine 1 was powered on. As a result, when the predetermined time has not elapsed since the power was turned on (step S2616; NO), the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of the level / coin related process.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on (step S2616; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a lottery process (stock coin data reset lottery process) for resetting stock coin data ( Step S2619). In this process, first, the stock coin storage area is cleared, and one stock is randomly selected from among a plurality of stock coin data having different value contents (i.e., different combinations of gold, silver, and copper). Determine coin data. The sub CPU 91a stores the determined stock coin data in the stock coin storage area (step S2620). Then, the sub CPU 91a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of the level / coin related process.

  In addition, when a gold coin is obtained, it may be configured to notify the acquisition of the gold coin. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a modification of the procedure of the level / coin related process (the process of S4007 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23) in the case of notifying the acquisition of a gold coin. In the example shown in FIG. 29, after executing the process of step S2611, the sub CPU 91a determines whether a gold coin has been acquired (step S2612). As a result, if a gold coin has not been acquired (S2612: NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2614. On the other hand, if a gold coin has been acquired (S2612: YES), notification of the acquisition of the gold coin is executed (step S2613). The notification is performed, for example, by displaying a message indicating that a gold coin has been obtained from the liquid crystal display 51, displaying an image, and outputting sound from the speakers 53 and 54.

  As described in detail in the item granting process of FIG. 47, when a coin is won, an item related to the effect mode set by the player or an item desired by the player can be obtained. For this reason, when the notification that the gold coin has been obtained is given, the player feels pleasure and the motivation to the game increases, so that the operation rate of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing a procedure of main menu operation processing after password input to be executed in the slot machine 1. This process is started by the player performing an operation for selecting any of the menu items on the main menu screen (see FIG. 13B) after the password is input (or after the “easy start” is selected). .

  When the player selects "today's result" (step S2701; YES), the sub CPU 91a indicates the contents such as the game history of the player from the password input or after the start of the game by the easy start to the current time A screen (not shown) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (step S2702). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a acquires the game history, the history of accomplished missions, the experience value, the level, and the acquisition from the personal history storage area, the experience value storage area, the level storage area, and the acquired coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b. Get data etc. Then, a screen showing the contents of the acquired data is generated and displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Alternatively, if "clear data" is selected by the player (step S2703; YES), the sub CPU 91a changes the control state from the specific effect mode to the normal effect mode (step S2704), and after the password input or an easy start The game history and the like of the player from the start of the game due to to the present time is cleared (step S2705). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a is assigned to the RAM 91b, password storage area, personal history storage area, experience value storage area, anniversary storage area, level storage area, model information storage area, immediate information storage area, effect setting Clear each of the storage area and the acquired coin storage area.

  Alternatively, if “player code creation” is selected by the player (step S2706; YES), the sub CPU 91a executes a two-dimensional code display process (step S2707).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of this two-dimensional code display process. First, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not a lottery condition for acquiring stock coins (stock coin acquiring lottery condition) is established (step S2801). In this embodiment, 1000 games (except for the game in the bonus state) have been consumed since password input or “Easy Start” is selected, and furthermore, three or more gold coins are stocked. It is determined that the lottery condition for obtaining stock coins is satisfied when any of the conditions of, and are satisfied.

  As a result, if the stock coin obtaining lottery condition is not satisfied (step S2801; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2807. On the other hand, if the stock coin acquisition lottery condition is satisfied (step S2801; YES), the sub CPU 91a turns on the stock acquisition lottery flag (step S2802) and after entering the password or after selecting "easy start" The medal difference number up to is calculated (step S2803). The medal difference number is obtained by subtracting the total number of medals inserted by the player from the total number of medals acquired by the player in the game period.

  After calculating the medal difference number, the sub CPU 91a executes stock acquisition lottery processing (step S2804). In this embodiment, in this lottery process, when the medal difference number is minus, the winning probability is higher than when it is plus.

  As a result of the stock acquisition lottery process, when the lottery is not won (step S2805; NO), the sub CPU 91a advances the process to be performed to the process of step S2807. On the other hand, if the lottery is won (step S2805; YES), the sub CPU 91a updates the acquired data stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM 91b according to the winning result (the type and the number of coins). Step S2806). In this embodiment, when winning in the stock acquisition lottery process, the specification is such that all stock coins can be acquired. Therefore, when the sub CPU 91a wins the lottery, it updates the stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area so that the number of gold, silver and copper coins becomes zero.

  In step S2807, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the game in the specific effect mode is due to the selection of "easy start". As a result, if it is a game at the easy start (step S2807; YES), the sub CPU 91a generates a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 20B) corresponding to the game at the easy start (step S2808).

  On the other hand, if it is not a game at the easy start, that is, it is a game by password input (step S2807; NO), the sub CPU 91a generates a two-dimensional code (see FIG. 20C) corresponding to the game by password input. (Step S2809).

  If the stock lottery flag is ON (step S2810; YES), the sub CPU 91a turns the stock acquisition lottery flag OFF (step S2811). In addition, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display an acquisition lottery effect screen for stock coins and causes the generated two-dimensional code to be displayed (step S2812). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display a JACK POT effect screen as shown in FIG. Then, in the case of not having won the lottery in the stock acquisition lottery process earlier, the sub CPU 91a, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), a JACKPOT effect screen indicating that the stock coin can not be acquired and The liquid crystal display 51 displays the generated two-dimensional code combined screen. On the other hand, when a lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 21C, a JACKPOT effect screen indicating that the stock coin can be obtained, and a screen on which the generated two-dimensional code is synthesized are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 Display on.

  On the other hand, if the stock lottery flag is not ON (step S 2810; NO), the sub CPU 91 a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the generated two-dimensional code in the normal mode without effect as shown in FIG. (Step S2813).

  Regardless of the presence or absence of the effect, if the effect switch 56 is operated or the state in which no operation is performed continues for a predetermined time while the two-dimensional code is displayed, the screen returns to the basic screen. At this time, the sub CPU 91a changes the control state from the specific effect mode to the normal effect mode (step S2814). Further, the sub CPU 91a clears the game history and the like of the player from the start of the game after the password input or the easy start to the present time (step S2815). Specifically, the sub CPU 91a is assigned to the RAM 91b, password storage area, personal history storage area, experience value storage area, anniversary storage area, level storage area, model information storage area, immediate information storage area, effect setting Clear the storage area and the acquired coin storage area.

  After the password is input as shown in FIG. 27, the process returns to the main menu operation processing, and when “end” is selected by the player (step S2708; YES), the sub CPU 91a displays the end confirmation screen as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the display 51 (step S2709). Here, when an operation to select “YES” is performed by the player or when a predetermined time has elapsed, the screen is switched to the basic screen. Alternatively, when the player performs an operation to select “NO”, the screen returns to the main menu screen (see FIG. 13B).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special effect execution process (the process of S4009 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23).

  In this process, first, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the game is in progress (S4101). If the game is not in progress (S4101: NO), the process ends. If the game is in progress (S4101: YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input of a detection signal from the photoelectric sensor 57 when a predetermined effect is generated (step S4102). Note that, as a predetermined effect, for example, the player is urged to perform an operation in front of the liquid crystal display 51 so that the photoelectric sensor 57 can be detected (such as holding a hand or waving a hand) Display of messages and images. If there is no input of a detection signal from the photoelectric sensor 57 (step S4102; NO), the process ends. If there is an input of the detection signal from the photoelectric sensor 57 (S4102: YES), it is determined whether the input level of the detection signal is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (S4103). That is, by determining whether the light amount of the reflected light received by the light receiving element 57b of the photoelectric sensor 57 is equal to or more than a predetermined amount, it is determined whether the action of the player is detected.

  If the input level of the detection signal is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (S4103; YES), the process is ended. When the input level of the detection signal is not equal to or more than the predetermined value (S4103; NO), that is, when the light amount of the reflected light received by the light receiving element 57b does not reach the predetermined amount and the player's action is detected In, perform special effects that will not be performed. The special effect is executed, for example, by displaying a premium character from the liquid crystal display 51, displaying a special message, or displaying from the liquid crystal display 51 a state of attacking the enemy character. A more advantageous AT such as transition to AT (assist time) which is a notification period for notifying specific information for specifying the operation mode of the stop button by special rendition, increase of AT continuation rate, addition of stock number of AT, etc. And notification of permission to shift to an advantageous RT (Replay Time). Thus, it is possible to perform the operation in anticipation that the special effect is performed when the predetermined effect described above occurs. The process ends when the special rendition is executed.

  Thus, the manufacturing cost of the slot machine 1 can be reduced by combining the detection by the photoelectric sensor 57 used to display the main menu screen with the detection for executing the special effect. In addition, the execution of the special effects can enhance the interest of the effects. Furthermore, the annoyance felt by the player when outputting the two-dimensional code can be eliminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the predetermined effect process (the process of S4010 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23). In the predetermined effect process, the sub CPU 91a checks whether a predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S701).

  When the predetermined effect executing flag is set in step S701 (that is, when the predetermined effect is being executed), the sub CPU 91a determines the value of the predetermined effect timer for measuring the effect period of the predetermined effect. Is decremented by 1 (step S702). Then, when the value of the predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S703), the predetermined effect is ended (step S704). In addition, the sub CPU 91a resets the flag under predetermined effect execution (step S705).

  If the predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the sub CPU 91a checks whether the game start timing has come (step S706). Note that, specifically, whether or not the game start timing has come can be determined by confirming whether or not a new reel rotation start command has been received. If it is not the game start timing, the process ends.

  If it is time to start the game, the sub CPU 91a specifies whether or not the bonus is internally won (step S707). Specifically, whether or not the bonus has been internally won can be specified by confirming whether or not the internal winning for the bonus is designated by the received internal win command.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a confirms whether or not there is an acquired coin (step S708). Specifically, whether or not there is an acquired coin can be determined by confirming acquired data updated in step S2611 of the level coin related process.

  If there is an acquired coin, the sub CPU 91a confirms whether or not the game is started when the password is input (step S709). In addition, it can be specifically judged by checking whether a password input flag is set whether the case where a password is input and a game is started is confirmed.

  If the password is input and the game is started, is the sub CPU 91a already set a coin informing completion flag indicating that there is already notification that there is an acquired coin in the predetermined effect executed before? It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S709X). If the coin informing completion flag is not set (that is, if it is not notified that there is still an acquired coin), sub CPU 91a responds to the identification result of whether or not the bonus in step S707 is internally won, A predetermined effect determination table for coin notification is selected as a predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the predetermined effect (step S710).

  On the other hand, if there is no acquired coin (N in step S 708), or if the password is input and the game is not started (N in step S 709), or if the coin notification completion flag is set (step S 709) In S709X Y), the sub CPU 91a does not notify the coin as a predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the predetermined effect according to the specification result of whether or not the bonus in step S707 is internally won. The predetermined effect determination table for is selected (step S711).

  Then, using the predetermined effect determination table selected in steps S710 and S711, the sub CPU 91a performs lottery processing based on random numbers, and determines the presence / absence and type of predetermined effect (step S712).

  In step S712, the sub CPU 91a determines the presence / absence and type (predetermined notification result) of the predetermined effect, for example, using the predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. FIG. 34A shows a predetermined effect determination table for coin notification absence. Further, FIG. 34B shows a predetermined effect determination table for coin notification presence.

  In the predetermined effect determination table for coin notification absence shown in FIG. 34 (A), the predetermined effect is not executed according to each of the case where the bonus is internally won and the case where the bonus is not internally won. A corresponding determination value, a determination value corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (x), and a determination value corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (o) are set. Further, in addition to these, a determination value corresponding to execution of a predetermined effect (coin) is also set in the predetermined effect determination table for coin notification presence shown in FIG. 34 (B). In addition, the determination value corresponding to performing at least the predetermined effect may be set in the predetermined effect determination table. Further, FIG. 34 shows not the determination values themselves but the number of determination values.

  The predetermined effect (x) is a predetermined effect for notifying that the bonus has not been won internally and that a coin has not been obtained (hereinafter, also referred to as an effect result of losing). Further, the predetermined effect (() is a predetermined effect for notifying that the bonus has been internally won. Further, the predetermined effect (coin) is a predetermined effect for notifying that a coin has been acquired. In this embodiment, when the predetermined effect (coin) is determined, the roulette is displayed in a state in which options “o” and “x” are all displayed as options (in this example, each square of the roulette). A predetermined effect is performed in such a manner that the ball rotates, and it appears as if the ball is stopped and displayed as a "x" option as an effect result, and the "x" option is switched to the "coin" option The effect of the aspect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the password is input and the game is started by execution of the above processing, if there is an acquired coin, the predetermined effect determination table for coin notification is selected in step S710. By performing the process of step S712, a predetermined effect (coin) may be determined and it may be notified that there is an acquired coin in the predetermined effect. In this embodiment, even if a password is input and a game is started, if there is no acquired coin, a predetermined effect determination table for coin notification absence is selected in step S711 and the process of step S712 is performed. By the execution of the predetermined effect (o) or the predetermined effect (x), the predetermined effect (coin) is not performed. Moreover, in this embodiment, even if there is an acquired coin, if “easy start” is selected and the game is started, a predetermined effect determination table for coin notification absence is selected in step S711 and step S712. By performing the process of (1), there is no case where either the predetermined effect (o) or the predetermined effect (x) is performed and the predetermined effect (coin) is performed. Furthermore, there is no password input and there is no selection of "Easy Start", so when the game is started, there is no case to obtain a coin, so it is always determined as N in step S708 and coin notification is not issued in step S711. When the predetermined effect determination table for is selected and the process of step S 712 is executed, either the predetermined effect (o) or the predetermined effect (x) is executed and the predetermined effect (coin) is executed. Absent.

  Next, the sub CPU 91a confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the predetermined effect in step S712 (step S713). If the predetermined effect is not to be performed, the process is ended. When it is determined to execute the predetermined effect, the sub CPU 91a selects effect data for executing a predetermined effect according to the type of the predetermined effect determined in step S712 (step S714).

  Next, the sub CPU 91a sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined pattern of the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect timer (step S715). Then, the sub CPU 91a starts a predetermined effect according to the effect data selected in step S714 (step S716), and sets a predetermined effect executing flag (step S717).

  Further, if the sub CPU 91a determines the predetermined effect (coin) as the type of the predetermined effect (Y in step S718), the sub CPU 91a sets a coin notification completion flag (step S719). In this embodiment, when the process of steps S709X, S718, and S719 is performed to notify that there is a coin obtained by a predetermined effect, the coin obtained by overlapping a predetermined effect performed thereafter is acquired. It is prevented that it reports that there is.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect aspect of a predetermined effect. In the example shown in FIG. 35, a case where a predetermined effect (coin) is executed is shown as an example. When a new game is started and it is decided to execute a predetermined effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (1), the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51, "o" and "x" options (figure In the example shown in 35, a picture of the roulette is displayed including “o” and “x” displayed in each square of the roulette. Next, as shown in FIG. 35 (2), with the indication suggesting the start of the predetermined effect such as “roulette chance!”, The effect such that the ball rotates the roulette is started, and the predetermined effect is started. Ru.

  Next, at the notification timing of the presentation result, as shown in FIG. 35 (3), the presentation is performed such that the ball once enters the square of the "x", and the presentation result of the predetermined presentation is out Perform the effect like Kano. Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (4), an effect is obtained that an acquired coin is obtained by performing an effect such that the eye on which the ball enters changes from "x" to "coin".

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, the case of executing the predetermined effect (coin) is shown, but in the case of executing the predetermined effect (O), in FIG. The effect of entering the ball is executed, and the confirmation is displayed with the ball in the square of "o". In addition, when performing the specified effect (x), in Figure 35 (3), the effect of entering the ball in the square of the "x" is executed, and the square of the entered "x" changes The display is confirmed with the ball entering the square of the "x" without doing it.

  Further, in this embodiment, when executing a predetermined effect (coin), as shown in FIG. 35, regardless of the type of the acquired coin being gold, silver or copper, “in a common mode” Although the case where it displays as "coin" and alert | reports that there exists an acquired coin is shown, it is not restricted to the alerting | reporting aspect shown by this embodiment. For example, by displaying "gold coin", "silver coin", "copper coin", etc., or changing the display color of "coin", the type of coin acquired is any of gold, silver and copper. May be notified so as to be identifiable. In addition, for example, the number of coins acquired may also be displayed in an identifiable manner by displaying a number together with the display of “coin”.

  Further, in this embodiment, once it is informed that there is a coin obtained by the predetermined effect by executing the processes of steps S709X, S718, S719, the predetermined effect (coin) is performed in the predetermined effect executed thereafter. Is prevented from being notified that there are duplicate earned coins as not being selected, but is not limited to such processing mode. For example, even if it is informed once that there is an acquired coin in a predetermined effect, if a new acquired coin is generated thereafter, it is notified that there is an acquired coin in a predetermined effect to be executed thereafter. It may be configured to be able to recognize that a winning coin has occurred. In this case, for example, a number may be displayed together with the display of “coin” to notify the increase in the number of acquired coins.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the bonus is internally won, it may be determined to execute the predetermined effect (coin) based on the presence of the earned coin. In this case, as shown in FIG. Although it is informed that there is an acquired coin in a predetermined effect in a manner as shown in 35 (in other words, the fact that internally winning a bonus is not notified in a predetermined effect) is used as a bonus in the predetermined effect. It may be configured to be able to notify both internal winning and winning coins are present. In this case, for example, in a predetermined effect in a roulette mode as shown in FIG. 35, an effect such as entering an eye of “o” is notified to notify that the bonus is internally won, and It is also possible to notify that there is an acquired coin in such a manner that an eye that has entered the ball changes from "o" to "coin" or "coin" is displayed together with "o".

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, a roulette picture including only "o" and "x" options is displayed to start the predetermined effect. The picture of the roulette may be displayed in a manner including the option from the beginning to start the predetermined effect. Hereinafter, the modification in the case of displaying the picture of a roulette in the mode which also includes the option of "coin" from the beginning, and starting a predetermined | prescribed effect is demonstrated using FIGS. 36-38.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a modification of the predetermined effect process (the process of S4010 of the timer interrupt process (sub) shown in FIG. 23). In FIG. 36, the processes of steps S701 to S708 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, the process of step S709 shown in FIG. 33 is not performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 36, when the sub CPU 91a determines in step S708 that there is an acquired coin, it proceeds to step S709X and determines whether the coin notified flag is set or not (step S709X). If the notification completion flag is not set, a predetermined effect determination table for coin notification is selected as a predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the predetermined effect (step S710). On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 a determines that there is no acquired coin at step S 708, or if it determines that the coin informed flag is set at step S 709 X, it proceeds to step S 711 and determines the presence and type of predetermined effect. The predetermined effect determination table for coin notification absence is selected as the predetermined effect determination table for (step S711).

  The processes of steps S712 to S713 are the same as the processes shown in FIG.

  Next, when determining that it is determined to execute the predetermined effect in step S713, the sub CPU 91a confirms whether or not the specific effect mode is controlled (step S714A). In addition, specifically, it can be determined by confirming whether the specific effect mode flag is set or not.

  If the specific effect mode is not controlled (N in step S714A), neither the case where the game is started by inputting the password, nor the case where the "easy start" is selected to start the game is performed. In this case, since it is impossible to obtain a coin, the sub CPU 91a includes only “o” and “x” as options according to the type of the predetermined effect determined in step S712 (option of “coin” The image of the roulette is displayed to select the effect data for no coin which starts the predetermined effect (not included) (step S714B).

  If it is controlled to the specific effect mode, the sub CPU 91a confirms whether or not the game is started when the password is input (step S714C). In addition, it can be specifically judged by checking whether a password input flag is set whether the case where a password is input and a game is started is confirmed.

  If the password has not been input and the game has not been started (ie, if "Easy Start" has been selected and the game has been started), the sub CPU 91a sets the type of the predetermined effect determined in step S712. Accordingly, a roulette picture including the option of "coin" in addition to the option of "o" or "x" is displayed to select effect data for a small amount of coins for starting a predetermined effect (step S714D).

  On the other hand, if the password is input and the game is started, the sub CPU 91a adds "o" or "x" to the option of "coin" according to the type of the predetermined effect determined in step S712. A roulette picture including options is also displayed to select effect data for many coins for starting a predetermined effect (step S714E).

  In the modified example shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, when the password is input and the game is started, "more easy" is selected as compared with the case where the "easy start" is selected and the game is started. A predetermined effect is started by displaying a roulette picture including the option of "coin". Therefore, in step S714D, effect data for a small amount of coins with few options for "coin" is selected, and in step S714E, effect data for a large number of coins with many options for "coin" is selected.

  The processes in steps S715 to S719 are the same as those shown in FIG.

  FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are explanatory views showing a modification of the effect aspect of the predetermined effect. Among these, FIG. 37 shows an effect mode of the predetermined effect when “Easy Start” is selected and the game is started. Further, FIG. 38 shows an effect aspect of the predetermined effect when the password is input and the game is started. In the examples shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, the case where a predetermined effect (coin) is executed is shown as an example.

  When a new game is started and it is determined to execute a predetermined effect, as shown in FIGS. 37 (1) and 38 (1), “O” and “O” are displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 51. In addition to the option of “X” (in the example shown in FIG. 35, “o” and “x” are displayed on each square of the roulette), the option of “coin” (in the example shown in FIG. 35, each of the roulette The picture of the roulette is displayed including the "coin" is displayed on the square. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37 (1), when “Easy Start” is selected and the game is started, only two options of “Coin” are provided, whereas in FIG. 38 (1) As shown, when the game is started with the password input, 4 options of "coin" are included, and when the password is input and the game starts, more options of "coin" are included. The predetermined effect is started in an aspect.

  It should be noted that different presentation modes are selected from those shown in FIG. 36 to FIG. 38 when “Easy Start” is selected and the game is started and the password is input and the game is started. For example, when "Easy start" is selected and the game is started, only one choice of "coin" is given, whereas when a password is input and the game is started By including three options of "coin", it may be possible to include more "coin" options when the password is input and the game is started, and the number of "coin" options There are various ways of setting.

  In addition, for example, when the password is input and the game is started, the predetermined effect is started in a mode including the option of "coin", and when the "easy start" is selected and the game is started. The predetermined effect may be started in a mode including only "o" and "x" options.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (2) and FIG. 38 (2), with the indication suggesting the start of a predetermined effect such as “roulette chance!”, An effect such as the ball rotating a roulette is started The predetermined effect is started.

  Next, at the notification timing of the effect result, as shown in FIG. 37 (3) and FIG. 38 (3), an effect is performed such that the ball enters the eye of the “coin” and FIG. 37 (4) And, as shown in FIG. 38 (4), it is informed that there is an acquired coin by the display being confirmed while the ball is in the eye of the “coin”.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the case of executing the predetermined effect (coin) is shown. However, in the case of executing the predetermined effect (○), FIGS. 37 (3) and 38 (3 (3) In), the effect of entering the eye of the "o" is executed, and the final display is performed with the ball entering the o's eye. In addition, when performing the specified effect (x), in Figure 37 (3) and Figure 38 (3), the effect of entering the ball in the square of the "x" is executed, and the "x" It will be displayed with the ball in the eye.

  In addition, even if "Easy Start" is selected and the game is started, and even if the password is input and the game is not started, there is no case to obtain a coin, so it is selected in step S714B The effect is executed according to the effect data for no coin, the predetermined effect is started in a mode including only the options of “o” and “x”, and the result of the effect of “o” or “x” is notified .

  Subsequently, the contents of each process executed by the management server 1200 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the server main process executed by the management server 1200. This server main process is executed each time there is a request for access to each web page managed by the management server 1200 from the portable terminal 1100. The control unit 210 of the management server 1200 executes the following processing in response to the access request.

  If there is a request for access to the web page for member registration from the portable terminal 1100 (step S2901; YES), the control unit 210 executes a member registration process (step S2902).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the member registration process, and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this process. The control unit 210 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the member registration request is already registered in the player database (step S3001). When the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (step S3001; YES), the control unit 210 transmits the member information (for example, the player name (registered name) transmitted from the portable terminal 1100 according to the operation of the player. ), Gender, date of birth, personal information such as prefecture, etc.) is reflected in the player information corresponding to the terminal identification information (step S3002). Thus, for example, the player can update only the member information if the member information has not been registered, although the player has been updated at the simple start described later, or the player has already been registered. Member information can be changed.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (step S3001; NO), the control unit 210 newly registers the player information corresponding to the player (the terminal identification information) in the player database ( Step S3003). In the player information in this case, only terminal identification information and member information transmitted from the portable terminal 1100 according to the operation of the player are stored. Then, the control unit 210 notifies the portable terminal 1100 that has made the member registration request of the registration result (step S3004). On the portable terminal 1100 that has received the registration result, the registration result is displayed, and the player is notified of that.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 39, when there is a request for access to the web page for easy start update from the portable terminal 1100 (step S2903; YES), the control unit 210 executes the easy start update process ( Step S2904).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the easy start update process, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the slot machine 1 and the portable terminal 1100 and the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this process. is there. The control unit 210 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 as the transmission source of the easy start update request has already been registered in the player database (step S3101). If the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (step S3101; NO), the control unit 210 newly registers the game result information corresponding to the player (the terminal identification information) in the player database (step S3102). Then, control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3104.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has been registered in the player database (step S3101; YES), the control unit 210 determines that the same terminal identification information in the game history database as the game random number specified from the update request. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the game history information corresponding to (step S3103). As a result, when the same game random number is stored in the game history information (step S3103; YES), the possibility of the update request by the same two-dimensional code as used in the previous update request is extremely high. The control unit 210 transmits, to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information, an indication that updating of the game history and the like is not possible (step S3110). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the same game random number is not stored in the game history information (step S3103; NO), the control unit 210 controls the player based on the game history update data, the acquisition data, etc. received from the portable terminal 1100. The contents of the player information corresponding to the player in the database are updated, and the game history information is additionally registered in the game history database (step S3104). Also, the status of the player information is updated while waiting. In the player information updating process here, the level and the experience value are not updated, but are updated in the level / experience value updating process described below.

  Next, the control unit 210 executes level / experience value update processing (step S3105). FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the level and experience point updating process.

  The control unit 210 updates the level included in the player information corresponding to the player (terminal identification information) to the level included in the received game history update data (step S3301). Further, the control unit 210 adds the experience value included in the received game history update data to the experience value included in the player information (step S3302). As a result of the addition, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the experience value is equal to or more than a predetermined value (10 experience value in this embodiment regardless of the level) according to the level (step S3303). As a result, when the experience value is not equal to or more than the predetermined value (step S3303; NO), the control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3306.

  On the other hand, when the experience value becomes equal to or more than the predetermined value (step S3303; YES), the control unit 210 increases the level by one (increases the level value by one) (step S3304). Then, the control unit 210 subtracts the value (here, 10 experience points) for the level raised by one from the experience value (step S3305). Thus, the level and the experience value included in the player information are updated.

  In step S3306, the control unit 210 executes a lottery process for giving points. The points are, like the earned coins, the exchange value when receiving the award of the benefit. If the player does not win in the lottery process (step S3307; NO), the control unit 210 returns the process to be performed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the player wins (step S3307; YES), the control unit 210 determines whether or not the points (details will be described later) included in the player information corresponding to the player is 1000 points or more. (Step S3308).

  As a result, when points are not 1000 points or more (step S3308; NO), the control unit 210 determines points corresponding to the total number of games included in the received game history update data, player information corresponding to the player Are added to the points included in (step S3309). For example, 1/10 points of the total number of games are added. In this case, if the total number of games is 1000, 1000 × 1/10 = 100 points are added. Then, control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3311.

  On the other hand, when points are 1000 points or more (step S3308; YES), the control unit 210 corresponds to twice the points corresponding to the total number of games included in the received game history update data, corresponding to the player The points included in the player information are added (step S3310). For example, double the points of 1/10 of the total number of games is added. In this case, if the total number of games is 1000, 1000 × 1/10 × 2 = 200 points are added.

  The control unit 210 clears the points included in the player information corresponding to the player (step S3311). Then, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  Returning to the easy start update process shown in FIG. 41, in step S3106, the control unit 210 transmits, to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information, that the game history update has been completed (step S3106). Next, the control unit 210 determines whether or not the easy start update request from the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information has been transmitted five times or more in total (step S3107).

  As a result, if not transmitted five or more times (step S3107; NO), the control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3109. On the other hand, if it has been transmitted five times or more (step S3107; YES), the control unit 210 indicates by the terminal identification information the password recommendation information to the effect that it is recommended to play a game upon receipt of the issued password. It transmits to the terminal 1100 (step S3108).

  In step S3109, the control unit 210 executes history display processing. The history display process is a process for causing the portable terminal 1100 to display the game history of the player based on the player information corresponding to the player. As a result, for example, the number of games this time, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, the number of games accumulated up to this time, the number of BBs, the number of RBs, and the like are displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100. In the history display process, the digest of the current game may be displayed.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 39, when there is a request for access to the web page for normal update from the portable terminal 1100 (step S2905; YES), the control unit 210 executes the normal update process (step S2906). ).

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal update processing, and FIG. 53 is a view showing exchange of data between the slot machine 1 and the portable terminal 1100, and the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this processing. . The control unit 210 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 as the transmission source of the normal update request is already registered in the player database (step S3201). When the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (step S3201; NO), the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that updating of the game history and the like is not possible. (Step S3209). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information is registered in the player database (step S3201; YES), the control unit 210 controls the password specified from the update request and the game corresponding to the terminal identification information in the player database. It is determined whether the password stored in the personal information matches (step S3202). As a result, if the passwords match (step S3202; YES), the control unit 210 advances the process to be performed to the process of step S3204.

  On the other hand, if the passwords do not match (step S3202: NO), the control unit 210 determines whether there is a mismatch of only one character and there is a difference between the first and second characters on the array when entering the password (step S3203). When the password is input, the difference between one character before and after is one character before and after the password input screen shown in FIG. 15B. For example, if one character included in the regular password is “Z”, The preceding and following ones correspond to "Y" and "=".

  As a result, when there is a noncoincidence of two or more characters, or if there is not a single back and front character difference (step S3203; NO), the control unit 210 indicates the portable terminal indicated by the terminal identification information It transmits to 1100 (step S3209).

  On the other hand, in the case where there is only one character mismatch, and there is a difference between one character before and after (step S3203; YES), the condition of the input mistake is temporarily authenticated as the player who has issued the password. The process proceeds to the process of step S3204.

  In step S3204, the control unit 210 determines whether the same password or game random number identified from the update request is stored in the game history information corresponding to the terminal identification information in the game history database. As a result, if the same password or game random number is stored in the game history information (step S3204; YES), it is extremely likely that the update request is based on the same two-dimensional code as used for the previous update request. Because it is high, the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the game history and the like can not be updated (step S3209).

  On the other hand, when neither the same password nor game random number is stored in the game result information (step S3204; NO), the control unit 210 is based on the game history update data, the acquisition data, etc. received from the portable terminal 1100. At the same time, the content of the player information corresponding to the player in the player database is updated, and the game history information is additionally registered in the game history database (step S3205). Also, the status of the player information is updated while waiting. Note that, in the player information update process here, the level and the experience value are not updated, and are updated in the following level / experience value update process.

  Next, the control unit 210 executes a level / experience value update process (step S3206). The contents of the level and experience point updating process are as described above (see FIG. 43).

  The control unit 210 transmits, to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information, that the updating of the game history has been completed (step S3207). Then, the control unit 210 executes history display processing (step 3208). The contents of the history display process are the same as the process of step S3109 of FIG.

  In the update of the player information in the case of the update of the player information in the case where the password is a mismatch of only one character and there is a difference of one letter before and after in the above normal update processing (step S3203; YES), Based on the acquired data etc., instead of updating all the corresponding items, among them, the total number of games, the total number of BBs, the total number of RBs, achievement mission that may appear at the level stored in the relevant player information Update only the items that do not affect the continuity of the game history, such as the type of the game history, and affect the continuity of the game history, such as the level, effect settings, types of achievement missions that do not appear at the level stored in the player information It is possible not to update items, earned coins, etc. At that time, in the notification of the update completion, the password did not completely match, but it was in the range of the input error, and therefore, only a part of the items that did not affect the continuity were updated. You may make it notify. In this way, the player has made a mistake in entering the password, but can recognize that the gaming history has been successfully updated. In addition, even if there is a gaming history that has not been updated, the cause is identified. It becomes possible.

  In addition, the condition of the input error is an arbitrary design item, and it is presumed that both the password registered in the management server 1200 and the password included in the update request have similarity, and the possibility of the input error is high. What is necessary is For example, it may be determined that the condition of the input error is satisfied based on the fact that both passwords differ by only one character, or the condition of the input error is satisfied if the difference is up to two characters. It may be determined that the Also, if the different characters in both passwords are likely to be wrong, such as "O" and "0", or if there is a difference between upper case and lower case, etc. It may be determined that the condition of the mistake is satisfied.

  Returning to the server main process shown in FIG. 39, when there is an access request to a web page for a menu screen from the portable terminal 1100, that is, when there is a menu data acquisition request (step S2907; YES), the control unit 210 It is determined whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 that is the transmission source of the request is already registered in the player database (step S2908). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (step S2908; NO), the control unit 210 instructs the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that acquisition of menu data is not possible. It transmits (step S2911). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information has been registered in the player database (step S2908; YES), the control unit 210 transmits menu data to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S2909). As a result, a menu screen as shown in FIG. 50D is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100. The menu screen displays a menu of items that can be provided to the player at the site managed by the management server 1200. Specifically, password issue, history display, achievement mission display, coin number display, custom setting, game execution, avatar setting, purchase of contents in the shop, browsing and posting on a bulletin board, etc. Each link for is displayed. When a desired link is selected by the player, control unit 210 executes menu selection acceptance processing (step S2910).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the menu selection acceptance process. When the link for password issuance is selected by the player (step S3401: YES), the control unit 210 executes a password issuance process (step S3402).

  FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the password issuing process. The control unit 210 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the portable terminal 1100 as the transmission source of the request is already registered in the player database (step S3501). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (step S3501; NO), the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information that the password can not be issued. (Step S3502). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information is registered in the player database (step S3501; YES), the control unit 210 determines the level, the model information, and the like based on the player information and the game history information corresponding to the player. Information such as immediate information, anniversaries, and other effect settings are acquired, and a password is generated based on the acquired information according to the reverse procedure to the procedure described with reference to FIG. 17 (b), The generated password is transmitted to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3503).

  Then, the control unit 210 stores the generated password as the previously issued password in the player information corresponding to the player and updates the status during the game (step S3504). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  FIG. 50F is a diagram showing an example of a password display screen displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100 when the link for issuing a password is selected. The player can input a password to the slot machine 1 while watching the password display screen.

  In the management server 1200 of this embodiment, when the password issue request is received, the issue of the password is not prohibited even if the status of the corresponding player information is in game, and such a situation Even if a new password issuance request is received, a new password is issued. Therefore, although a password is issued but a game is not played, a game is played but a two-dimensional code is not obtained, or even if a two-dimensional code is obtained, an update request is not made. It is possible to receive a new password issuance without performing access to release the password.

  Returning to the menu selection receiving process shown in FIG. 44, when the player selects the link of the number of earned coins (step S3403; YES), the control unit 210 controls the player information corresponding to the player in the player database. The number of gold, silver, and copper coins currently acquired by the player is acquired, and screen data indicating the result is transmitted to the portable terminal 1100 (step S3404). As a result, on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100, a screen indicating the content of the currently acquired coin as shown in FIG. 50 (H) is displayed.

  Alternatively, when a link for game execution is selected by the player (step S3405; YES), the control unit 210 executes a game providing process (step S3406).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game providing process. The control unit 210 transmits a game application (in this embodiment, a slot machine game) to the mobile terminal 1100 (step S3601). Thus, the player can execute the slot machine game as shown in FIG. 50I on the portable terminal 1100. In this slot machine game, when the same symbol is aligned in the lateral direction or in the oblique direction, the point is increased according to the symbol. In addition, when the player ends the game application, the game application transmits, as a result of the execution, the points acquired by the player to the management server 1200.

  If the execution result of the game application, that is, no points are received (step S3602; NO), the control unit 210 returns the process to be performed to the process of the caller of this process. On the other hand, when a point is received (step S3602; YES), the control unit 210 updates and registers the received point in the player information corresponding to the player in the player database.

  Further, the control unit 210 adds a coin (gold, silver, copper) corresponding to the received point to the acquired coin included in the player information (step S3604).

  Further, the control unit 210 adds the points corresponding to the received points to the points included in the player information (step S3605). Then, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  Returning to the menu selection receiving process shown in FIG. 44, if the player selects a shop link (step S3407; YES), the control unit 210 executes an item giving process (step S3408).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the item assignment process, and FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 regarding this process. The control unit 210 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal 1100 is already registered in the player database (step S3701). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (step S3701; NO), the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 that the item assignment is not possible (step S3702). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, when the terminal identification information is already registered in the player database (step S3701; YES), the control unit 210 extracts the obtained coin from the player information corresponding to the player in the player database, and the player It is determined whether or not the player has obtained a silver coin or a copper coin (step S3703).

  If a silver coin or a copper coin has been acquired (step S3703: YES), it is determined whether or not an effect setting has been performed in the effect setting process shown in S2309 of FIG. 25 (step S3704). If the effect setting has been made (step S3704; YES), the process proceeds to step S3707. If the effect is not set (step S3704; NO), the number of games is extracted from the player database, and it is determined whether the number of games is 1000 or more (step S3705).

  If the number of games is not 1000 or more (step S3705; NO), the lottery table E (see FIG. 48E) is selected as the lottery table used in the item acquisition lottery (step S3712). If the number of games is 1000 or more (step S3705; YES), the item setting process is executed (step S3706).

  In the item setting process, an item list indicating a plurality of types of items (for example, item A or item B) is transmitted to the portable terminal 1100. The display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100 that has made the item request displays a screen indicating the items that can be assigned. By setting the link corresponding to the desired item type by the player, data indicating the selected item type is transmitted to the management server 1200. When receiving the item type desired by the player from the portable terminal 1100, the control unit 210 stores the received item type in the benefit database.

  When the item setting process is completed, the control unit 210 determines whether the number of games is 5000 or more (step S3707). Then, based on the determination result and the setting contents of the effect or the setting contents of the item, it is selected from among the drawing tables A to D (see (A) to (D) shown in FIG. (Step S3708). When the selection of the lottery table is performed, an item acquisition lottery process for determining an item to be given to the player is executed (step S3709). When the item acquisition lottery process is completed, the item data of the item type determined by the item acquisition lottery executed in the process is read out from the storage location indicated by the privilege database to extract the item (step S3710) and transmitted to the portable terminal 1100 Step S3711).

  Here, lottery tables A to E used in the item acquisition lottery will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, in the lottery table A, the assignment probability of the item A is set to 60%, and the assignment probability of the item B is set to 40%. The lottery table A is used in the item acquisition lottery when the item A is associated with the set effect or the item A is set in the item setting process and the number of games is 5,000 or more.

  As shown in FIG. 48B, in the lottery table B, the assignment probability of the item A is set to 80%, and the assignment probability of the item B is set to 20%. The lottery table B is used in the item acquisition lottery when the item A is associated with the set effect or the item A is set in the item setting process and the number of games is 5000 or less.

  As shown in FIG. 48C, in the lottery table C, the assignment probability of the item A is set to 40%, and the assignment probability of the item B is set to 60%. The lottery table C is used in the item acquisition lottery when the item B is associated with the set effect or the item B is set in the item setting process and the number of games is 5,000 or more.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (D), in the lottery table D, the assignment probability of the item A is set to 20%, and the assignment probability of the item B is set to 80%. The lottery table D is used in the item acquisition lottery when the item B is associated with the set effect or the item B is set in the item setting process and the number of games is 5000 or less.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (E), in the lottery table E, the assignment probability of the item A is set to 50%, and the assignment probability of the item B is set to 50%. The lottery table E is used in the item acquisition lottery when the effect setting is not performed and the number of games is within 1000 games.

  In this manner, in the lottery tables A to D, when the effect is set, the provision probability of the item related to the effect set is higher than when the effect is not set, and the number of games exceeds 1000 games. In the case where the number of games is equal to or less than 1000, the probability of item assignment is set such that the probability of item assignment set by the player is higher than that in the case where the number of games is within 1000 games. In addition, in the lottery tables A to D, when the number of games exceeds 5000 games, the item assignment probability is changed.

  Returning to the item giving process shown in FIG. 47, if the silver coin or the copper coin is not obtained (step S3703; NO), it is determined whether the gold coin is obtained (step S3710). If a gold coin has not been obtained, that is, if any of gold, silver and copper coins have not been obtained as a result (step S 3713; NO), the processing is terminated. If a gold coin has been acquired (step S3713; YES), it is determined whether or not the setting of the effect has been performed in the effect setting process shown in S2309 of FIG. 25 (step S3714).

  If the effect setting has been made (step S3714; YES), the process proceeds to step S3716. If the effect setting has not been made (step S3714; NO), the item setting process is executed (step S3715). In the item setting process, the same process as step S3706 is performed. Thereafter, the item type is specified from the setting content of the effect or the setting content of the item, the item data of the specified item type is read from the storage location indicated by the privilege database, and the item is extracted (step S3716). It transmits (step S3711). Thus, the player can acquire data such as a two-dimensional code indicating content data.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the slot machine 1 provides a benefit (in this example, a coin of gold, silver, or copper) different from the advantageous gaming state (in this example, the bonus). . In addition, game related information related to the game (in this example, game history such as total number of games, number of BBs, number of RBs, earned coins, etc.) is stored so as to be identifiable, and information that can specify the game related information is output (In this example, a two-dimensional code is displayed). Further, based on the operation of the player, the setting for outputting information capable of specifying the game related information (in this example, the input of the password) is performed, and the setting for outputting the game related information is performed. Sometimes, a bonus is given advantageously in comparison to when no setting for outputting game related information is made. Then, an advantage possibility suggesting result (in this example, an rendering result of "o" or "x" in the present example) indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state as a rendering result or a privilege indicating that a privilege is given Suggested effect (in this example, the notification result (in this example, the effect of "coin" in this example) is reported after executing the effect in the common mode (in this example, such an effect as the ball rotates the roulette) , Predetermined effect). Therefore, if the setting for outputting the game related information is performed, the rate at which the benefit is advantageously given and the notification that the benefit is given by the suggestion effect is also high, so the game related information is output. It is possible to improve the interest regarding the provision of the benefit to the player who is setting for setting.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the slot machine 1 imparts a predetermined exchange value (a coin of gold, silver and copper in this example) as a benefit. Then, the management server 1200 gives a predetermined advantageous value (in this example, an item) by consuming a predetermined exchange value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest regarding the provision of a predetermined exchange value as a benefit to the player who is setting for outputting the game related information.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the slot machine 1 has an advantage game suggestion result (in this example, a "○" effect in this example) indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous game state as an advantage possibility suggestion result in the suggestion effect. It is possible to notify a non-advantage game suggestion result (in this example, an “x” presentation result) indicating that the game is not controlled to the advantageous game state). In addition, when setting for outputting game-related information is performed, option display effect (in this example, as shown in FIG. 35) in which a plurality of option displays corresponding to each effect result is displayed in the suggested effect. Display the picture of roulette including the options of “○” and “×” and start executing the roulette with the effect of rotating the ball), then switch from the non-advantage game suggestion result to the benefit giving suggestion result and notify It is possible (in this example, after showing that the effect result of “x” is once as shown in FIG. 35 (3), “coin from the effect result of“ x ”as shown in FIG. 35 (4) Switch to the result of Therefore, by making the notification aspect of the suggestion effect have surprisingness, it is possible to further improve the interest regarding the provision of the benefit to the player who is setting for outputting the game related information.

  Further, in this embodiment, when configured as in the modification shown in FIGS. 36 to 38, when the slot machine 1 is set to output game related information, the slot machine 1 is configured as follows: The option display corresponding to the non-favorable game suggestion result displayed when the setting for outputting the game related information is not performed is replaced with the option display corresponding to the privilege giving suggestion result and displayed to execute the option display effect (In this example, as shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, when the game is started by inputting the password, compared with the case where “Easy Start” is selected and the game is started, After the effect of turning the ball on the roulette is started in a mode including more options of “coin”, it is possible to notify of the result of suggestion of provision of benefits. Therefore, by making the notification aspect of the suggestion effect have surprisingness, it is possible to further improve the interest regarding the provision of the benefit to the player who is setting for outputting the game related information.

  In this embodiment, in the suggestion effect (in this example, the predetermined effect), it is shown a case of notifying whether the bonus game state has internally won the bonus, but the advantage game to be notified in the suggestion effect The states are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. For example, it may be configured to be able to notify in suggestion effect that AT (assist time), RT (replay time), or ART has been shifted as the advantageous gaming state. In addition, for example, it may be configured to be able to notify in the suggestion effect that the small winning combination and the re-play combination are won.

  Moreover, although the case where gold | metal | money, silver, and a coin of copper are provided as a privilege was shown in this embodiment, the information provided as a privilege is not restricted to what was shown by this embodiment. For example, the experience value as shown in this embodiment is regarded as a benefit, and when the password is input and the game is started, the experience value is advantageously given compared to the case where it is not so. You may

  Further, in this embodiment, the slot machine 1 side performs processing for giving a benefit (in this example, a coin of gold, silver, or copper), and the management server 1200 side performs a predetermined advantageous value (this In the example, it is shown that the process of giving the item is performed, but for example, the process of giving the benefit is not necessary, and the slot machine 1 side performs the process of giving a predetermined advantageous value. It may be configured. In this case, the slot machine 1 performs processing to determine whether or not to apply a predetermined advantage value (for example, an item such as an image), and causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the item such as the determined image. Just do it. Also, for example, the slot machine 1 may be configured to display a two-dimensional code including a determination result as to whether or not to give an item such as an image, instead of directly displaying an item such as an image. Then, when the player captures an image of the two-dimensional code and accesses the Web server using the portable terminal 1100, the item such as the determined image may be downloaded to the portable terminal 1100. Then, in the slot machine 1 configured as such, when a password is input and a game is started, a predetermined advantageous value may be advantageously provided as compared with the case where it is not so.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a setting for outputting information capable of specifying game-related information, an operation of inputting a password is shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in addition to the operation of inputting a password, the operation of selecting “easy start” may be regarded as setting for outputting information that can specify game-related information. In this case, for example, it is configured that a small percentage of benefits are given even if neither the password input nor the “easy start” selection operation is performed, and the password input operation or “easy start” is performed. When the selection operation is performed, a benefit may be advantageously provided as compared with the case where the selection operation is not performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which effects such as rotating a roulette ball are executed as a suggested effect (in this example, a predetermined effect). However, the effect mode of the suggested effect is this embodiment. It is not limited to what was shown. For example, even if the effects are the same in the roulette mode, effects may be performed such that the roulette performs a rotational operation. Further, for example, as a suggested effect, an effect may be performed such that the dice are rotated, and an effect such as notifying an effect result depending on which eye of the dice stops. Further, for example, as a suggested effect, an effect may be performed such that the film is rotated, and an effect such as notifying the effect result depending on which frame on the film is stopped may be performed.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, when the effect is set, the probability that the item of the type related to the set effect is given is high, as compared with the case where the effect is not set. It is possible to give an item preferred by the player, and to let the player feel the pleasure of giving an item. In addition, since it is possible to set an effect and to increase the willingness to play a game, the operating rate of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, when the number of games played by the player is 1000 or more, the probability of giving an item set by the player, that is, an item desired by the player is higher than when the number of games is 1000 or less. A player can be motivated to play a game, and the operation rate of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, when a gold coin is obtained, an item related to the effect set by the player or an item set by the player is given, and when a gold coin is obtained, the player is notified of the fact. It can identify that the item which oneself likes is given. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game again, and the operation rate of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, when the number of games is 5,000 or more, the probability of giving an item is changed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a increases the items selectable as the effect setting each time the value of the level exceeds a certain value. More specifically, the frequency of effect (effect setting 1), the main character (effect setting 2), the character's costume (effect setting 3), the effect background design (effect setting 4), BGM (benefit) by the player's selection operation It is possible to select effect setting 5), and in these effect settings, it is possible to select from three types until the level exceeds 30 and becomes selectable from five types if the level exceeds 30 and exceeds level 60 And can be selected from eight types. And, in the item giving processing shown in FIG. 47, although an example of giving either item A or item B has been described, the setting is performed when the number of items increases according to the level as in this embodiment. Any of the items (ie, items) related to the selected effect is determined by an item acquisition lottery and given, or the player sets any of a plurality of items (ie, items) to be an item The present invention can be implemented by granting the item set when winning by the winning lottery.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described in the case where an item giving process different from the item giving process shown in FIG. 47 is executed.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the item assignment process, and FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the exchange of data between the portable terminal 1100 and the management server 1200 in relation to this process. The control unit 210 determines whether the terminal identification information (SIM data) of the mobile terminal 1100 is already registered in the player database (step S3701). As a result, when the terminal identification information is not registered in the player database (step S3701; NO), the control unit 210 transmits to the portable terminal 1100 that the item assignment is not possible (step S3702). Thereafter, the control unit 210 returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, if the terminal identification information has been registered in the player database (step S3701; YES), the control unit 210 extracts the acquired coins and points from the player information corresponding to the player in the player database, Based on the benefit database (see FIG. 22C), items that can be awarded are extracted according to the extracted acquired coins and points (step S3703). Then, the control unit 210 generates a list of extracted items, and transmits the generated item list to the portable terminal 1100 indicated by the terminal identification information (step S3704).

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100 that has made the item request displays a screen indicating the items that can be assigned. On this screen, the remaining number of gold coins, the remaining number of points, a link for selecting an available item, the number or point of gold coins required for the application, and the menu screen of FIG. 50 (D) A link is displayed to leave the shop for transition.

  Here, the remaining number of gold coins is 12, the remaining number of points is 1234 points, and a link for purchasing item A, one gold coin for purchasing item A, or , 100 points are required, and with the link to purchase item B, it is shown that two gold coins are required to purchase item B.

  In the screen of FIG. 50 (G), when the player selects a link corresponding to a desired item type, data indicating the selected item type is transmitted to the management server 1200.

  When the control unit 210 receives the item type desired by the player from the portable terminal 1100 (step S3705; YES), the control unit 210 reads out the item data indicated by the received item type from the storage location indicated by the benefit database. It transmits to the terminal 1100 (step S3706).

  As a result, the player can acquire data such as content data or a two-dimensional code indicating an exchange ticket or an application ticket.

  Returning to the menu selection acceptance process shown in FIG. 44, when each other link is selected by the player (step S3409; YES), the control unit 210 executes a process according to the selected link (step S3409). S3410). For example, when a link of history display is selected by the player, the control unit 210 transmits, to the portable terminal 1100, screen data for causing the player to select a date. As a result, a date selection screen as shown in FIG. 50E is displayed on the display unit 140 of the portable terminal 1100. On this date selection screen, a link of choices of dates of the game history information corresponding to the player in the game history database is displayed. When one of the links is selected by the player, the control unit 210 controls the game based on the game history information of the date corresponding to the selected link and the player information corresponding to the player. The game history of the player is extracted and transmitted to the portable terminal 1100. As a result, a history display screen as shown in FIG. 50C is displayed on the display unit 140 of the mobile terminal 1100.

  When the main menu screen for displaying a two-dimensional code is displayed in the slot machine of this embodiment, the same processing as S2204 to S2207 in FIG. 24 is performed as in the first embodiment. The main menu screen (or two-dimensional code) may be displayed automatically by detecting the portable terminal 1100. Furthermore, processing similar to the item giving processing of FIG. 47 may be performed to give an item related to the set effect or an item set by the player.

  As described above, according to the gaming system 1001 of this embodiment, in the game utilizing the function of accumulating the gaming history in the slot machine 1, the game result disadvantageous for the player, such as the difference in the number of medals becomes negative. When the game is ended at, the probability of acquiring stock coins is set to be higher. Therefore, even if the player loses in the game, the player can actively output the two-dimensional code and maintain the desire to receive the award from the management server 1200. Therefore, after the end of the game, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the player goes away without outputting the two-dimensional code, and as a result, it can be expected to promote utilization of the service provided by the gaming system 1001.

  Although the determination as to whether the game result is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player is based on the difference in the number of medals, the determination criterion is an arbitrary design matter. For example, 0 sheet may be used as a reference, and a negative number or a positive number may be used as a reference. Further, the probability of acquiring stock coins is not limited to two cases of advantageous and disadvantageous cases, and may be changed in multiple stages depending on the degree of advantage and the degree of disadvantage. For example, when the difference in the number of medals is −1001 or less, the probability is increased most, and −1000 to −500, −500 to 0, 0 to 500, 500 to 1000, 1001 or more, and the like. The probability may be lowered each time the difference in number of medals increases.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, at the end of the gaming game using the function of accumulating the gaming history, if the lottery condition for winning stock coins is satisfied, the winning lottery effect for producing stock coins (JACKPOT effect) is executed. Do. As a result, the player's aspiration is scolded and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, even if the winning lottery condition for stock coin is not established, the JACK POT effect may be executed. However, in this case, an effect screen (FIG. 21 (b)) to the effect that acquisition has failed is always displayed.

  Further, at the time of JACK POT presentation, for example, the degree of expectation of acquisition may be indicated by display of background or character, output of sound or sound effect, or the like.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, stock coin data is reset by lottery when power is turned on or when a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. For this reason, even when an individual owns the slot machine 1, improperly acquiring coins by repeating the game in a state after power on frequently, for a long time (for example, in a game arcade) In this way, it is possible to prevent the improper acquisition of coins due to the game).

  The time from when the power is turned on to when the stock coin data is reset can be set arbitrarily, but is preferably set to a time (eg, 20 hours) longer than the normal business hours of the game arcade. By setting such a time, resetting of stock coin data during business hours (game time) is avoided, and a player does not feel discouraged or distrusted.

  The stock coin data may be reset at a predetermined time. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the inappropriate acquisition of coins due to the long game. Also in this case, it is preferable to set to a time (e.g., midnight) which is not the normal business hours of the game arcade from the same effect as the above.

  Also, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, after “stock coin hint” is selected by the player within a predetermined time (for example, one hour) after resetting stock coin data, stock coin storage area The predetermined one of the screens shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. 14 is displayed regardless of the value contents of the stock coin data stored in. By doing this, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether stock coin data has been reset or not, and the interest can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, a password is applied as information capable of specifying the game history input to the gaming machine (slot machine 1), and it is necessary to provide a dedicated reader or the like for inputting information from the outside. It can be said that it is preferable because there is no code, but it may be coded as a barcode or a two-dimensional code, and it may be data readable by a code reader provided in the gaming machine, wired connection, wireless connection, infrared connection, etc. The data may be data that can be input to the gaming machine, and such a configuration makes it possible to easily input these data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a two-dimensional code is applied as information capable of specifying the game history output from the gaming machine (slot machine 1), and the data can be easily obtained only by the player holding the two-dimensional code reader. It can be said that it is preferable because it can be acquired, but it may be output as other code data readable by a code reader such as a bar code, or data which can be output by wire connection, wireless connection, infrared connection etc. The password may be applied as well as the information input to the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, only the portable terminal 1100 to which the terminal identification information is added and the transmission of the terminal identification information is permitted is permitted to access the management server 1200, but at least the portable terminal A portable terminal to which terminal identification information is added when the player can be identified by information (Cookie) which can identify 1100 or the player can be identified by the player ID given by the management server 1200 side. Alternatively, access from a portable terminal not permitted to transmit terminal identification information may be permitted.

  In the above embodiment, the player information registered in the player database and the gaming history information registered in the gaming history database are managed using the terminal identification information as a key item, but the player is identified. A possible player ID may be used as a key item and managed.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment, contents such as a coin win specification between games (see FIG. 12 (a)), stock specifications of stock coins (see FIG. 12 (c)), and a lottery condition for obtaining stock coins Is merely an example and is not limited to these contents. For example, in the inter-game coin acquisition specification, all stock coins may be acquired when a high level mission is achieved. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play and to improve the interest.

  In addition, when there is no stock coin, the condition may be higher for the player in obtaining coins between games (see FIG. 12A) as compared to the case where there are stock coins. In this case, for example, the type of coin acquired by the player may be ranked up (for example, gold or silver for copper, gold for silver). In this way, even if all stock coins have been earned at the end of the game by the previous player (also known to surrounding players by JACKPOT effect), the next player has a desire to play the game. A game in the slot machine 1 can be started without deterioration.

Third Embodiment
Next, a slot machine to which the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention is applied, a management server to which the management apparatus according to the third embodiment of the present invention is applied, and a game according to the third embodiment of the present invention Describe the system. In addition, since the game system of this embodiment has the structure common to the game system 1001 of Embodiment 1 mentioned above, the structure different from Embodiment 1 is mainly demonstrated here.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the game utilizing the function of accumulating the game history, when predetermined conditions are satisfied, the player receives the provision of a predetermined benefit from the management server 1200. It was the composition which gives the coin (3 types of gold, silver and copper) which is exchange value. Therefore, the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine 1 contains acquired data as shown in FIGS. 20 (b) and 20 (c). On the other hand, the slot machine of this embodiment does not have a configuration for giving coins. In the two-dimensional code output from the slot machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and (c), instead of the acquired data, after entering the password, or after selecting the "Easy Start" game The number of medal differences up to the end time is stored.

  On the other hand, when the management server of this embodiment receives an update request (a simple start update request, a normal update request) from the portable terminal 1100, it is given to the player based on the received game history update data and the medal difference number. Determine the type and number of coins to be At that time, in the management server, when the medal difference number indicates that the game is ended with a game result which is disadvantageous for the player, such as being minus, it indicates that the game is ended with an advantageous game result. The rate at which more coins (including the increase in the number of coins and the upgrading of coin types) is given is higher than in the case where

  As described above, in this embodiment, the slot machine does not have a complicated function, and the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be expected. That is, even if the player loses in the game, the player can actively output the two-dimensional code and maintain the motivation to receive the award from the management server. Therefore, after the end of the game, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the player leaves without leaving the two-dimensional code, and as a result, it can be expected to promote utilization of the service provided by the gaming system.

  The management server may give points under higher conditions if the medal difference number indicates that the game is ended with a game result which is disadvantageous to the player.

  Also, as a modification of this embodiment, the slot machine does not have the total number of medals, but the total number of medals obtained by the player during the game period and the total number of medals inserted by the player in the game period. It may be output by including it in a dimensional code. In this case, on the management server side, the total number of medals inserted by the player may be subtracted from the total number of medals acquired by the player to obtain the medal difference number.

  When the main menu screen for displaying a two-dimensional code is displayed in the slot machine of this embodiment, the same processing as S2204 to S2207 in FIG. 24 is performed as in the first embodiment. The main menu screen (or two-dimensional code) may be displayed automatically by detecting the portable terminal 1100. Furthermore, processing similar to the item giving processing of FIG. 47 may be performed to give an item related to the set effect or an item set by the player.

Fourth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment, the case where the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment described above is replaced with a pachinko gaming machine 700 will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 700, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 700. FIG.

  The pachinko gaming machine 700 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 700 has a glass door frame 702 formed in the shape of a frame provided so as to be able to be opened and closed in the game frame. The play slot is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (games described later And the disc 706).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 702, there is a striking ball supply plate (upper plate) 703. On the upper surface of the hit ball supply tray 703, a chance button 7111 is provided which is operated when a specific effect is executed in the variable display of the effect pattern (decorative pattern). The chance button 7111 corresponds to the effect switch 56 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  A selection button 112A is operated on the front of the hit ball supply tray 703 where the chance button 7111 is provided, for selecting various setting items as described in FIGS. 13, 15, 16 and 19. , 7112 B are provided. The selection buttons 7112A and 7112B correspond to the stop switches 8L and 8R at the time of displaying the screen as shown in FIG. 13, FIG. 15, FIG. 16, and FIG. 19 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  At the bottom of the ball supply tray 703, a surplus ball tray 704 for storing gaming balls as gaming media which can not be accommodated in the ball supply tray 703, and a ball operation handle (operation knob) 705 for firing a ball (game ball). It is provided. Also, on the back of the glass door frame 702, a game board 706 (see FIG. 5) is detachably attached. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, on the front of the game board 706, a game area 707 is formed in which the inserted game balls can flow down. In the game area 707, a large number of nails are implanted to guide the game balls.

  Near the center of the game area 707, an effect display device 709 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. In the effect display device 709, variable display (also referred to as variable display, update display, or cyclic display) of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. The fluctuation display of the effect pattern is executed in various fluctuation modes such as scroll display and in-situ switching display. The effect display device 709 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as multiple types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 709, an effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern on the display screen is provided, and three (left, middle, and right) are displayed in the effect pattern display area, for example. There is a symbol display area as a display area for varyingly displaying the effect pattern of). Each of these three production | presentation design is a production | presentation design as multiple types of identification information which can identify each. The effect display device 709 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed by the first special symbol display 708a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 709 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 708b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the upper part of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, a first special symbol display (first variation display means) 708a that variably displays first special symbols as plural types of identification information that can identify each of them. It is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of fluctuating display of the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 708a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). On the right side of the upper part of the effect display device 709 in the game board 706, a second special symbol display (second variation display means) 708b that variably displays a second special symbol as plural types of identification information capable of identifying each of them. It is provided. The second special symbol display 708 b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of fluctuating display of the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 708 b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers from 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display 708b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed on condition that the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed by the second special symbol display 708b. As for the second special symbol, the variable display is executed on the condition that the first special symbol display 708a does not execute the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed without being simultaneously variably displayed.

  The 1st start condition or the 2nd start condition which is the execution condition of the change display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the 1st start winning opening 713 or the 2nd starting winning opening) of the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol After winning 714), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and The game is started based on the establishment of the jackpot game), and when the fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It is to be noted that the winning is that the gaming ball has passed (a gaming ball has entered) an area defined as a winning area such as a winning opening in advance. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  In the following description, the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 713 may be referred to as the first start winning, and the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 714 is referred to as the second start winning There is a case. The start condition is satisfied, but the data regarding the variable display when the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as pending storage data which is the right to perform the variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the suspension storage data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 755 of the game control microcomputer 7560 described later. The first start winning hold storage data is stored in the first hold storage buffer as the first hold storage data with a predetermined number (for example, four) as the upper limit, and the second start winning hold storage data is a predetermined number (for example, 4) Data stored in the second hold storage buffer as the second hold storage data with an upper limit.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 700, a bat striking device (see FIG. 11) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the bat operating handle 705 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the gaming ball into the gaming area 707. Not shown). The game balls fired from the ball launch device enter the game area 707 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descend in the game area 707. If the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 713 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 713a, if it is in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the fluctuation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 708a, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decorative design) is started in the effect display device 709 Be done. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 713. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the number of first pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 714 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 714a, if it is in a state where it can start the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 2 start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display 708b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol and the variation display of the production symbol (decorative pattern) starts in the effect display device 709 Be done. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 714. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b. The variation display of the production design (decorative design) as the design of the The variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 708a and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 708 b and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 709 are synchronized. The synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are substantially the same (or may be the same) and the periods of the variable display are substantially the same (or may be the same). In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 708a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 708b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 709 The combination of is displayed stopped. The first special symbol display 708a, the second special symbol display 708b, and the effect display device 709 described above are variable display devices that perform variable display of identification information and derive and display display results, and are used as a variable display unit Be

  In the effect display device 709, when the variable display is started, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start the variable display. Then, the left, middle, and right presentation symbols that are fluctuatingly displayed are basically stopped in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as the order of the left presentation symbol, the right presentation symbol, and the middle presentation symbol) When the predetermined variation time has elapsed from the start of the variation display, all the left, middle and right rendering symbols stop and the display result is determined. Note that the left, middle, and right presentation symbols may be stopped in any order other than the left, right, and middle symbol orders. Also, the left, middle and right effect symbols may be stopped at the same time.

  Below the effect display device 709, a winning device having a first start winning opening 713 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and is detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

  In addition, a variable winning ball device (electric tulip) having a second starting winning opening 714 (second starting opening) where the game ball can win a prize below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 713. ) 715 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and is detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by the solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 714 (it becomes easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the second starting winning hole 714 than the first starting winning hole 713. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 714. In the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win). As described above, the state in which the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state may be a state in which the gaming ball hardly wins or does not win in the second start winning opening 714.

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 713 and the second starting winning opening 714 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state, the gaming ball heading to the variable winning ball device 715 is extremely easy to win the second start winning hole 714. And although the first start winning opening 713 is provided immediately below the effect display device 709, the distance between the lower end of the effect display 709 and the first start winning opening 713 can be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening It is difficult to arrange the nails closely around 713 or to make the arrangement of the nails around the first starting winning opening 713 difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 713, and the winning ratio of the second starting winning opening 714 May be made higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 713.

  At the lower part of the first special symbol display 708a, the number of activated winning balls entering the first starting winning opening 713, that is, the first number of pending storages (pending storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning storage) is displayed 4 A first special symbol hold storage indicator 718a consisting of one indicator (for example, an LED) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 718a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, whenever the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  At the lower part of the second special symbol display 708b, the second special symbol hold consisting of four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of activated winning balls entering the second start winning opening 714, ie, the second reserved memory number A storage indicator 718b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 718b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708 b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 709 is provided with a first hold storage display unit 718c for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 718d for displaying the second hold storage number. (Each display area is provided). In addition, an area (summed pending storage display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total pending memory number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. As described above, by providing the combined hold storage display unit for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the variable winning ball device 715 is provided which performs the opening and closing operation only for the second starting winning opening 714. The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball device that performs opening and closing operations for any of the start winning openings 714 is provided.

  While the variable display of the effect design in the effect display device 709, a reach state may occur. Here, in the reach state, when the effect pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitutes part of the combination of the big hit symbols, the fluctuation of the effect pattern which is not yet stopped and displayed continues. The displayed state or the display state in which all or part of the production symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination of the big hit symbols. In other words, reach refers to a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable areas is in a variable display mode. In this embodiment, in the reach state, for example, the same symbol stops in the left and right symbol display areas, and the symbol does not stop in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  And the display production in the reach state is reach production display (reach production). In addition, at the time of reach, there are times when the effect which is different from usual is done with the lamp and the sound. This effect is called reach effect. In addition, at the time of reaching, a character (effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a symbol (a effect pattern or the like)) is displayed, or a display mode (for example, color) of a background image of the effect display device 709 ) May be changed. This change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called reach effect display. Also, among the reach, when it appears, it is set so that a big hit is more likely to occur than a normal reach (normal reach), and there is a high hit that has a high degree of reliability. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball device 720 has an opening and closing plate, and is a variable winning capable of changing to an open state (first state) where game balls can win, and a closed state (second state) where game balls do not win. It is an apparatus. In the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 720 may be configured to be hard to win, but to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win). As described above, the state in which the special variable winning prize ball device 720 is in the closed state may be a state in which the gaming ball hardly wins or does not win in the special variable winning prize ball device 720.

  Special variable winning ball device 720 is a solenoid in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a or the second special symbol display 708b. By controlling the open / close plate to the open state by 721, the special winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 723.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 720 performs repeated continuous control to repeat the open state and the closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning prize ball device 720 is opened is called a round. In this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, any jackpot type is selected. In this embodiment, a control example is shown in which the special variable winning prize ball device 720 is opened only once in one round, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Special variable prizes such as two or more times in one round Control may be performed to open the ball device 720.

  Under the effect display device 709, a normal symbol display 710 (not shown) is provided. The normal symbol display 710 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “o” and “x”) called a normal symbol.

  When the gaming ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (the symbol is visible when lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol ○), the variable winning ball device 715 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the condition of the variable winning ball device 715 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state for the player (a state where the game ball can win in the second start winning opening 714) Change to

  In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol hold storage display 741 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls passed through the gate 732 is provided. Every time the game ball passes to the gate 732, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 732 a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 741 increases the number of lighted indicators by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 710 is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one. The upper limit value of the common drawing reserve storage number is four, and in the normal symbol reserve storage indicator 741, the indicator is lit with the four as the upper limit value.

  At the left and right periphery of the game area 707 of the game board 706, a decoration LED 725 is provided which blinks during the game, and at the lower part is an outport 726 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, two speakers 727R and 727L for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided at the upper left and right of the game area 707, respectively. On the outer periphery upper portion, outer periphery left portion and outer periphery right portion of the game area 707, a sky frame LED 728a, a left frame LED 728b and a right frame LED 728c provided on the front frame are provided. For example, the sky frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c are related displays in pseudo renditions as repeated fluctuation patterns (including respective first fluctuation periods during one fluctuation period). When an effect such that an effect is performed is performed, control is performed to blink.

  The repeated fluctuation pattern refers to a fluctuation pattern in which a specific effect display is repeatedly performed a predetermined number of times after the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the effect design until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the reach effect is performed. . Here, the specific effect display is, for example, an effect display such as an effect display that changes again, and is an effect display that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, for example, in an effect display other than the re-change display such as a notice display. It may be. In this embodiment, as an example of the repetitive fluctuation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo-repetitive fluctuation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times as a rendition as a specific effect display.

  Here, the pseudo ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of suspension memories are being performed in a continuous manner although it is originally a single fluctuation corresponding to one suspension memory It is an abbreviation showing a pseudo continuous variation.

  In addition, within the fluctuation time which was decided vis-a-vis the 1 start winning a prize, in order to make it appear as if the variable indication (variable display) of the plural times of the symbol was executed vis-a-vis the starting winning a prize with 1 It refers to a special variation pattern (also referred to as variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all symbol rows (left, middle, right). For example, the larger the number of repetitions of re-variation (also referred to as the pseudo-series re-variation), the greater the confidence in the big hit (the big hit and when it goes out) The degree of the rate selected sometimes, the degree of the big hit rate, that is, the degree of reliability of the big hit) becomes high. More specifically, the percentage selected when determined to be a big hit is high. In the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo ream, the combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 709 is called a combination of temporary stop symbols. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined from any of the plurality of chances (hereinafter referred to as the pseudo run chance eyes) consisting of the combination of the symbols other than the combination of the big hit design (the pseudo run chance eye). In addition, in the case where the pseudo continuous change is performed, it is also possible to finally execute some reach effect as the reach state.

  In addition, a prize ball LED 751 is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 728 b and provided in the vicinity of the prize ball remaining number, and a sphere out LED 752 provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 728 c is provided. . The sky frame LED 728 a, the left frame LED 728 b, the right frame LED 728 c, and the decoration LED 725 are an example of a light emitter for effect provided in the pachinko gaming machine 700. In addition to the various LEDs for effect (for decoration) described above, LEDs and lamps for effect are installed.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 700 (not shown).

  FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 57, the payout control board 737, the effect control board 780, and the like are also shown. On the main substrate 731 is mounted a microcomputer for game control 7560 which controls the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to a program.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O 757. In this embodiment, the ROM 754 and the RAM 755 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a RAM 755 in addition to the CPU 756, and the ROM 754 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O 757 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program stored in the ROM 754, and hence the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing) Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within a numerical value range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 7503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and an updating rule of numerical data. It has various functions such as a selection switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. For example, the predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 7560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 754 (ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 7560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 7503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 7503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 reads the numerical data from the random number circuit 7503 as random R when the first start opening switch 713a or the second start opening switch 714a has a start winning combination, and starts changing the special symbol and the effect symbol. Sometimes it is decided based on random R whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result, that is, whether or not to be a jackpot. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state that is advantageous for the player.

  In addition, the RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 755 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, at least the data according to the gaming state, that is, the data according to the control state by the gaming control microcomputer 7560 (such as the special symbol process flag and the value of each pending storage number counter) and the number of unpaid prize balls, Stored in The data corresponding to the control state by the gaming control microcomputer 7560 is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. is there. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 755 is backed up by the power supply.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply substrate is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 7560. The power supply substrate is provided with a reset circuit that generates a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like. When the reset signal goes high, the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like becomes operable, and when the reset signal goes low, the game control microcomputer 7560 or the like stops operating. Therefore, while the reset signal is at the high level, an allowance signal for permitting the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 7560 or the like is output, and the period when the reset signal is at the low level is the gaming control microcomputer. An operation stop signal for stopping an operation such as 7560 is output. The reset circuit may be mounted on each of the electric component control boards (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped to a predetermined value or less is input. That is, the power supply substrate monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC 30 V, DC 5 V, etc.) used in the game machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (predetermined power supply voltage A power supply monitoring circuit is mounted which outputs a power-off signal indicating that when it detects it). Further, a clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM has been operated is inputted to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560.

  Also, an input driver circuit for giving a detection signal from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, the count switch 723, the general winning port switch 711 and the recovery path sensor 712 to the gaming control microcomputer 7560 758 is also mounted on the main substrate 731. When the main substrate 731 receives the detection signals from the various switches, it sends out to the payout control substrate 737 a prize ball signal for causing the payout balls to be dispensed according to the various switches. When receiving the winning ball signal, the payout control board 737 drives the ball payout device 797 to pay out the winning balls according to the winning ball signal.

  The general winning opening switch 711 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 706, and detects, for example, a gaming ball that has entered a general winning opening (not shown) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It is a switch. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the gaming balls by the general winning opening switch 711.

  Further, the collection path sensor 712 is a transmission type optical sensor which is installed at a predetermined position of a common path through which all the game balls collected by the pachinko gaming machine 700 pass, and which detects the passage of the game balls.

  In addition, a solenoid 716 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 715, and an output circuit 759 for driving the solenoid 721 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 720 for forming the big winning opening It is mounted on a substrate 731. Furthermore, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main substrate 731.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 780 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 through the relay board 777. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 709 which variably displays the effect pattern is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation control signal from the chance button 7111 is input to the effect control board 780, and effects are displayed according to the operation signal from the chance button 7111, as shown in FIGS. 13, 15, 16 and 19. Execute the decision operation on the screen etc explained.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation control signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B are input to the effect control board 780, and FIGS. 13, 15, 16 and are shown according to the operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B. Execute the selection operation on the screen described in 19.

  The effect control board 780 has an effect control microcomputer (not shown) including an effect control CPU and a RAM (none of which are shown). The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 780, the effect control CPU operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal from the main board 731 inputted via the relay board 777. In response to (effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver and the input port (neither is shown). The effect control CPU causes the VDP (video display processor) (not shown) to perform display control of the effect display device 709 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP that performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer is mounted on the effect control board 780. The VDP has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer, and maps the VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 709.

  The effect control CPU reads out necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for pre-storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 709, specifically, a person, characters, figures or symbols (including an effect pattern). The effect control CPU outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP. The VDP executes display control based on data input from the CPU for effect control.

  The CPU for effect control executes the effect according to the operation signal input from the chance button 7111 and determines the selection item on the screens of FIGS. 13, 15, 16 and 19 or the like. The CPU for effect control executes selection of selection items on the screens of FIGS. 13, 15, 16 and 19 in accordance with the operation signals inputted from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 is connected to a power supply circuit (not shown), and the effect control CPU of the effect control board 780 has a power supply monitoring function of monitoring that power is supplied from the power supply circuit.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to an input driver (not shown) in the effect control board 780. The input driver only allows the signal input from the relay substrate 777 to pass in the direction toward the inside of the effect control substrate 780 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control substrate 780 to the relay substrate 777). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a means.

  Furthermore, the CPU for effect control outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 735 via an output port (not shown). Further, the effect control CPU outputs sound number data to the sound output board 770 via the output port.

  In the lamp driver substrate 735, a signal for driving the LED is input to an LED driver (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The LED driver supplies a drive signal to each of the LEDs provided on the frame side, such as the sky frame LED 728 a, the left frame LED 728 b, and the right frame LED 728 c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 725 provided on the game board 706 side. When a light emitter other than an LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 735.

  In the voice output board 770, sound number data is input to a voice synthesis IC (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The speech synthesis IC generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data, and outputs the speech and sound effects to an amplification circuit (not shown). The amplifier circuit outputs, to the speakers 727 R and 727 L, an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level according to the volume set by the volume (not shown). Further, control data corresponding to the sound number data is stored in an audio data ROM (not shown). The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect pattern).

  Replacing the total number of games and the BB count (RB count) of the gaming history of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above with the total rotation number and the big hit count of the variable display of the effect display 709 of the pachinko gaming machine 700 it can. Further, the medal difference number calculated in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment can be replaced with the game ball difference number obtained by subtracting the total number of the game balls hit in from the total number of the game balls paid out. For example, the total number of game balls paid out can be calculated based on the detection results of each of the first starting opening switch 713a, the second starting opening switch 714a, the count switch 723 and the general winning opening switch 711. Further, the total number of game balls thrown in can be calculated based on the detection result of the collection path sensor 712.

  Further, in the case of displaying a main menu screen for displaying a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 700, the same processing as S2204 to S2207 in FIG. The main menu screen (or two-dimensional code) may be displayed automatically upon detection of the display 1100. Furthermore, processing similar to the item giving processing of FIG. 47 may be performed to give an item related to the set effect or an item set by the player.

  Next, a specific operation example of the pachinko gaming machine 700 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer (specifically, effect control CPU) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 780. In the main process, the effect control CPU starts execution of the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (step S7001). .

  After that, the CPU for effect control executes a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a predetermined random number (step S7002). Then, the timer interrupt flag is monitored (step S7003). If the timer interrupt flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S7002. When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interruption flag is set, the CPU for effect control clears the flag (step S7004), and executes the effect control process of steps S7005 to S7011.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S7005).

  Next, the CPU for effect control performs main menu display processing (step S7006), main menu operation processing before password input (step S7007), levels in accordance with the processing similar to steps S4005 to S4009 in FIG. 23 described in the first embodiment. The coin related process (step S7008), the password input main menu operation process (step S7009), and the special effect execution process (step S7010) are executed.

  Next, the CPU for effect control performs effect control process processing (step S7011). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 709.

  Also in this embodiment, coins of gold, silver and copper are provided as in the first embodiment, and stock coins are also stocked. FIG. 59 is an explanatory view showing a coin earning specification among games and stock specification of stock coins in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 59 (a) shows the coin acquisition specifications when the password is input. In this embodiment, for example, when a jackpot is won, one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded with a probability of 100%. Also, every time the variable display is performed 2000 times, any one of gold, silver and copper coins is given with a probability of 100%. However, as the number of times of variable display increases, the probability that a good color coin (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) is given is increased.

  Also, when the mission is completed, coins are awarded with 100% probability according to the level of the achieved mission. For example, one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded at the completion of a level high mission. In addition, any two gold, silver or copper coins will be awarded when the mission during the level is achieved, and any one gold, silver or copper coin may be awarded when the level low mission is achieved. Be done. In addition to the acquisition of coins during such a game, the details will be described later, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  Furthermore, when a mission with a high level and a medium level is achieved, coins to be awarded are added on condition that there are stock coins to be described later. In this case, for example, any two coins of gold, silver and copper are additionally awarded when the mission of level high is achieved, and any of gold, silver and copper coins are awarded when the mission during level is achieved. One additional card is awarded.

  Further, in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the advantage of the coin acquisition condition is different between when the password is input and when “Easy Start” is selected, and the password is input. Can win more coins than if "Easy Start" is selected.

  FIG. 59 (b) shows the coin earning specifications when “Easy Start” is selected. For example, when a jackpot is won, one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded with a probability of 50%. Also, every time the variable display is performed 2000 times, any one of gold, silver and copper coins is awarded with a probability of 50%. However, as the number of times of variable display increases, the probability that a good color coin (copper → gold or silver, silver → gold) is given is increased.

  Also, when the mission is completed, coins are awarded 50% of the time depending on the level of the accomplished mission. For example, one gold, one silver, and one copper coin are awarded at the completion of a level high mission. In addition, any two gold, silver or copper coins will be awarded when the mission during the level is achieved, and any one gold, silver or copper coin may be awarded when the level low mission is achieved. Be done. In addition to the acquisition of coins during such a game, the details will be described later, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end of the game, coins are awarded to the player.

  Furthermore, upon completion of the level high, medium mission, coins to be awarded are added, provided that there is stock coin. In this case, for example, any two coins of gold, silver and copper are additionally awarded when the mission of level high is achieved, and any of gold, silver and copper coins are awarded when the mission during level is achieved. One additional card is awarded.

  Then, when a coin is awarded to the player, the acquired data (each coin of acquired gold, silver, and copper) stored in the acquired coin area allocated to the RAM of the effect control microcomputer according to the content thereof Data indicating the number of sheets) is updated.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows stock specification of stock coin. For example, when a jackpot is won, one of gold, silver and copper coins is stocked with 100% probability. Also, every time the variable display is performed 100 times, one of gold, silver and copper coins is stocked with a probability of 20%.

  Then, when a coin is newly stocked, stock coin data stored in the stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM of the effect control microcomputer is updated according to the content.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing effect control process processing (step S7011) in the main processing shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU first executes a first predetermined effect process (step S810A) and a second predetermined effect process (step S810B).

  Next, the CPU for effect control performs one of the processes in steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 709 is controlled, and variable display of the decorative symbol is realized, but control regarding variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second The control regarding the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. Even if the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed by another effect control process process Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which effect control process process is used to display the variation of the decorative symbols.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received from the gaming control microcomputer 7560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decoration variation start process (step S801).

  Ornamental symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornamental symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol change processing (step S802).

  Ornamental symbol variation processing (step S802): Control the switching timing and the like of each variation state (variation rate) constituting the variation pattern and monitor the end of the variation time. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is displayed and updated to a value corresponding to the symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Control of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for reporting the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 709. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 709, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing an example of an execution section of a predetermined effect. The "predetermined effect" is whether or not the specific effect (reach effect) is executed in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, or the variable winning ball device 715 is in a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes) State) to notify whether or not to be controlled. Moreover, in this embodiment, it may be notified that a predetermined type of hit (for example, a small hit) will be made in the predetermined effect. In this embodiment, in a predetermined effect, an effect of an aspect in which the roulette is rotated on the display screen of the effect display device 709 is executed. In the predetermined effect, it is not necessary to necessarily notify that 100% specific effect is executed, or to notify that the 100% variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters, and is specified. A notification may be given that suggests the possibility that the effect will be executed, or a notification that suggests that the variable winning ball device 715 may be controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters. Further, the predetermined effect is executed by the effect control microcomputer.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61, the predetermined effect is executed in the order of the indication effect, the start effect, the informing effect, and the informing effect. A period in which the indication effect is performed is referred to as a first period, and a period in which the start effect, the informing effect, and the result informing effect are performed is referred to as a second period.

  In addition, the execution of the first period (prediction effect) may be omitted. In addition, the period of the result notification effect may be shortened.

  The indication effect is an effect that reminds the player that the predetermined effect is started. The start effect is an effect for causing the player to recognize that the predetermined effect has been started. The informing effect is an effect that makes the player expect that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters. The result notification effect can be recalled as to whether or not the player is controlled to a state in which the variable winning ball device 715 can easily enter the game ball.

  In addition, it is desirable that the indication is performed in the first period and the case not to be developed after the start effect in the second period (in this example, the effect of roulette) after the execution in the second period. In such a case, by performing the indication effect, not only the expectation that the effect such as roulette may be performed but also the uneasiness that it may not necessarily develop to the effect such as roulette Can improve the effect of the indication effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described later, when the presence or absence of a predetermined effect or the notification result is determined with the start of the variable display of the normal symbol as a trigger and the predetermined effect is executed, the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol There are cases where the presence or absence of a predetermined effect and the notification result are determined with the start of display as a trigger, and the predetermined effect is executed. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect performed and executed with the start of the variation display of the normal symbol is referred to as the "first predetermined effect", and the start of the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol There is a case where a predetermined effect to be performed and executed as a trigger is referred to as a "second predetermined effect".

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a roulette mode in which effects such as roulette turns are executed and a dice mode in which effects such as dice are turned are executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect color of the predetermined effect includes a red effect color and a blue effect color. Therefore, in this embodiment, the combination of the effect mode and the effect color of the predetermined effect is a roulette mode in which the effect color is red, a roulette mode in which the effect color is blue, a dice mode in which the effect color is red, and a effect color There are four types of blue dice.

  Next, a specific example of the effect aspect of the predetermined effect will be described. 62 to 65 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect mode of the predetermined effect performed in the roulette mode. 66 to 69 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode of the predetermined effect executed in the dice mode.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62 to FIG. 65, a specific example of the effect aspect of the predetermined effect performed in the roulette aspect will be described. First, FIG. 62 exemplifies an effect for notifying that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (A), in the effect display device 709, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started from the state in which the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the left middle, right is stopped (see FIG. 62 (B)) ). At that time, display control is performed such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves. The effect by such display control corresponds to the predictive effect.

  Next, control is performed to display a notification image (for example, an image displaying "roulette chance") 9b which is an image for an effect as if a predetermined effect is started (see FIG. 62C). . The effect by such display control corresponds to the start effect. Then, the effect for notification is started.

  In this embodiment, the informing effect in the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is such an effect that the symbol changes in the effect area 9F (effect in an aspect in which the roulette rotates) (see FIG. 62 (D)). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, the image 9c indicating that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 62E). Next, a notification image 9d is displayed to notify that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (see FIG. 62 (F)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9e that clearly indicates that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in a state (open state) where the game ball easily enters (see FIG. 62F). A period in which display control is performed as shown in FIGS. 62E and 62F corresponds to a period for effect notification effect.

  For example, after receiving the normal symbol fluctuation start designation (hit) command, the effect control microcomputer changes the variable based on the reception of the normal symbol fluctuation end designation command specifying that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is ended. Stop display of the image 9c suggesting that the winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball is easy to enter (see FIG. 62 (E)), and the normal motorized role material opening end transmitted at the end of the first opening Based on the reception of the designated command, the notification image 9d is displayed to notify that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (see FIG. 62F).

  In addition, the microcomputer for effect control stops the image 9c which suggests that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters after a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal symbol variation end designation command is received. It may be displayed.

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer may display the notification image 9d when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image 9c was stopped and displayed. In that case, the notification image 9d is displayed in response to the reception of the normal symbol variation end designation command.

  Also, when the game control microcomputer 7560 is configured to transmit the normal motor combination release start designation command at the start of opening of the variable winning ball device 715, the effect control microcomputer is in the first opening. The notification image 9d may be displayed upon reception of the normal motor combination product release start designation command or on reception of the normal motor combination product release start specification command at the second opening.

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer displays the image 9c when a predetermined time (for example, a fluctuation time) has elapsed since the normal symbol fluctuation start designation (hit) command indicating that the display result is a hit and a symbol is received. Further, the notification image 9d may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, a time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) elapses. In that case, the notification image 9d is displayed in response to the reception of a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command.

  Next, FIG. 63 exemplifies an effect for notifying that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is to be made.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the effect display device 709, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the middle left and right is stopped (see FIG. 63 (B) ). At that time, an indication effect is performed such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves.

  Next, the start effect, which is the effect as if the predetermined effect is started, is executed (see FIG. 63 (C)). Then, the effect for notification is started.

  The informing effect in the predetermined effect of the roulette mode is such an effect that the symbol changes in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 63D). Thereafter, in the effect area 9F, the image 9f indicating that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is displayed is stopped (see FIG. 63E). Next, a notification image 9g is displayed to notify the user of the occurrence of a predetermined type of hit (see FIG. 63F). After that, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9h clearly indicating that the second big winning opening (by the movable member 76) is controlled to a state (open state) where the game ball easily enters (FIG. 63 (F )reference). A period in which display control is performed as shown in FIGS. 63E and 63F corresponds to a period for effect notification effect.

  Next, FIG. 64 exemplifies an effect for notifying that reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in the effect display device 709, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started from the state in which the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the middle left and right is stopped (see FIG. 64 (B)) ). At that time, an indication effect is performed such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves.

  Next, the start effect, which is the effect as if the predetermined effect is started, is executed (see FIG. 64 (C)). Then, the effect for notification is started.

  The informing effect in the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is such an effect that the symbol changes in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 64D). After that, in the effect area 9F, an image (image for informing that the expectation of the big hit is high) 9i is suggested to be displayed as a stop (see (E) in FIG. 64). In the example shown in FIG. 64, an image including the character string of “superheat” is shown as the image 9i that suggests reaching, but in this embodiment, an image that suggests reaching As, there are two, an image containing the string of "superheat" and an image containing the string of "chance". And in this embodiment, when it becomes super reach, compared with the case where it becomes normal reach, the image containing the character string of "superheat" rather than the image containing the character string of "chance" is stopped and displayed. Rate is high.

  Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state (see FIG. 64 (F)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9 j that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach (see FIG. 64F). A period in which display control is performed as shown in FIGS. 64E and 64F corresponds to a period for effect notification effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined effect is performed to notify that the specific effect (reach effect) is executed or that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes). In that case, the specific effect (reach effect) is not executed before the notification results are notified, and the variable winning ball device 715 is not controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes) (notice result of loss) In some cases, a predetermined effect (that is, a predetermined effect of “false”) may be performed.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory view showing a specific example in the case where a predetermined effect of notifying a notification result of an outing is performed before notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (A), in the effect display device 709, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the middle left and right is stopped (see FIG. 65 (B)) ). At that time, an indication effect is performed such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves.

  Next, the start effect, which is the effect as if the predetermined effect is started, is executed (see FIG. 65 (C)). Then, the effect for notification is started.

  The informing effect in the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is such an effect that the symbol changes in the effect area 9F (see FIG. 65D). After that, in the effect area 9F, the reach effect is not executed, and the image 9k indicating that the variable winning ball device 715 is not controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters (passes) (notice result of loss) is stopped and displayed ( See FIG. 65 (E)).

  Next, for the effect for notification, the variation of the symbol is started in the effect area 9F, and the effect such that the effect for notification is started again is executed (see FIG. 65 (F)). After that, in the effect area 9F, an image (image for notifying that the expectation of the big hit is high) 9i that indicates reaching the reach is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 65 (G)). Then, the display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state (see FIG. 65 (H)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9 j that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach (see FIG. 65 (I)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66 to FIG. 69, a specific example of the effect mode of the predetermined effect performed in the dice mode will be described. First, FIG. 66 exemplifies an effect for notifying that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball easily enters.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (1), in the effect display device 709, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started from the state in which the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the middle left and right is stopped (see FIG. 66 (2)) ). In this case, similarly to the predetermined effect in the roulette mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 65, display control is performed such that the character image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves as an indication effect. It is also good.

  Next, control is performed to display a notification image (for example, an image displaying "dice chance") 9l which is an image for an effect as if a predetermined effect is started (see FIG. 66 (3)). . The effect by such display control corresponds to the start effect. Then, the effect for notification is started.

  In this embodiment, the informing effect in the predetermined effect of the dice mode is an effect of an aspect in which the dice rotate below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 66 (4)). Thereafter, the dice stop rotating below the display screen of the effect display device 709, and the image 9m is suggested to stop the variable winning ball device 715 to be controlled so that the game ball can easily enter (FIG. See 5). Next, a notification image 9n is displayed to notify that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (see FIG. 66 (6)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9 o which clearly indicates that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in a state (open state) where the game ball easily enters (see FIG. 66 (7)). A period in which display control is performed as shown in FIGS. 66 (6) and 66 (7) corresponds to a period for effect notification effect.

  For example, based on the fact that the microcomputer for effect control has received the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command and then the normal symbol variation end designation command has been received, the variable winning ball device 715 enters a state in which the game ball easily enters The variable winning ball is displayed based on the stop display of the image 9m suggesting to be controlled (see FIG. 66 (5)) and the reception of the normal motor winning combination open end designation command transmitted at the end of the first opening. A notification image 9n is displayed to notify that the device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball is easily entered (see FIG. 66 (6)).

  In addition, the microcomputer for effect control stops the image 9m which suggests that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of receiving the normal symbol variation end designation command. It may be displayed.

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer may display the notification image 9n when a predetermined time has elapsed since the image 9m was stopped and displayed. In that case, the notification image 9n is displayed in response to the reception of the normal symbol variation end designation command.

  Also, when the game control microcomputer 7560 is configured to transmit the normal motor combination release start designation command at the start of opening of the variable winning ball device 715, the effect control microcomputer is in the first opening. The notification image 9n may be displayed upon reception of the normal motor combination product release start designation command or on reception of the normal motor combination product release start specification command at the second opening.

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer displays an image 9m when a predetermined time (for example, fluctuation time) has elapsed after receiving a normal symbol fluctuation start designation (hit) command indicating that the display result is a hit and a symbol. Further, the notification image 9n may be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, a time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) elapses. In that case, the notification image 9n is displayed in response to the reception of a normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command.

  Next, FIG. 67 illustrates an effect for notifying that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is to be made.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (1), in the effect display device 709, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the middle left and right is stopped (see FIG. 67 (2)) ). In this case, similarly to the predetermined effect in the roulette mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 65, display control is performed such that the character image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves as an indication effect. It is also good.

  Next, the start effect, which is the effect as if the predetermined effect is started, is executed (see FIG. 67 (3)). Then, the effect for notification is started.

  The informing effect in the predetermined effect of the dice mode is an effect of an aspect in which the dice rotate below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 67 (4)). After that, the dice stop rotating below the display screen of the effect display device 709, and the image 9p is suggested to stop being a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) (FIG. 67 (5)) reference). Then, an informing image 9 q is displayed to notify occurrence of a predetermined type of hit (see FIG. 67 (6)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9r clearly indicating that the second big winning opening (by the movable member 76) is controlled to be in a state (open state) where the game ball can easily enter (FIG. 67 (7 )reference). A period in which display control is performed as shown in FIGS. 67 (6) and 67 (7) corresponds to a period for effect notification effect.

  Next, FIG. 68 exemplifies an effect for notifying that reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (1), in the effect display device 709, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started from the state in which the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the middle left and right is stopped (see FIG. 68 (2)) ). In this case, similarly to the predetermined effect in the roulette mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 65, display control is performed such that the character image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves as an indication effect. It is also good.

  Next, the start effect which is the effect as if the predetermined effect is started is executed (see FIG. 68 (3)). Then, the effect for notification is started.

  The informing effect in the predetermined effect of the dice mode is an effect of an aspect in which the dice rotate below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 68 (4)). Thereafter, the dice stop rotating below the display screen of the effect display device 709, and an image (image for notifying that the expectation of the big hit is high) 9s indicating that the reach is reached is stopped (FIG. 68). (5) In the example shown in FIG. 68, an image including the character string of "superheat" is shown as the image 9s that suggests reaching, but in this embodiment, an image that suggests reaching As, there are two, an image containing the string of "superheat" and an image containing the string of "chance". And in this embodiment, when it becomes super reach, compared with the case where it becomes normal reach, the image containing the character string of "superheat" rather than the image containing the character string of "chance" is stopped and displayed. Rate is high.

  Then, the display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state (see FIG. 68 (6)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9t that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach (see FIG. 67 (7)). A period in which display control is performed as shown in FIGS. 68 (6) and 68 (7) corresponds to a period for effect notification effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined effect is performed to notify that the specific effect (reach effect) is executed or that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes). In that case, the specific effect (reach effect) is not executed before the notification results are notified, and the variable winning ball device 715 is not controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes) (notice result of loss) In some cases, a predetermined effect (that is, a predetermined effect of “false”) may be performed.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory view showing a specific example in the case where a predetermined effect of notifying a notification result of an outing is performed before notifying that a specific effect (reach effect) is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (1), in the effect display device 709, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started from the state in which the fluctuation (variable display) of the decorative symbol in the left middle, right is stopped (see FIG. 69 (2)) ). In this case, similarly to the predetermined effect in the roulette mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 65, display control is performed such that the character image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 moves as an indication effect. It is also good.

  Next, the start effect, which is the effect as if the predetermined effect is started, is executed (see FIG. 69 (3)). Then, the effect for notification is started.

  The informing effect in the predetermined effect of the dice mode is an effect of an aspect in which the dice rotate below the display screen of the effect display device 709 (see FIG. 69 (4)). Thereafter, the dice stop stopping below the display screen of the effect display device 709, and the reach effect is not executed, and the variable winning ball device 715 is not controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters (passes) (notice result of loss) The image 9 u suggesting the stop is displayed stopped (see FIG. 69 (5)).

  Next, for the effect for notification again, an effect such that the dice rotate in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 709 is started, and an effect such that the effect for notification is started again is executed (FIG. )reference). Thereafter, the dice stop rotating below the display screen of the effect display device 709, and an image (image for notifying that the expectation of the big hit is high) 9s indicating that the reach is reached is stopped (FIG. 69). (7)). Then, the display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state (see FIG. 69 (8)). Thereafter, the effect display device 709 displays an image 9t that clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach (see FIG. 69 (9)).

  In the predetermined effect of the dice form shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, an effect using the character image 9a may be performed in the same manner as the predetermined effect of the roulette aspect shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 70 to FIG. 72 are flowcharts showing the first predetermined effect process (step S810A). In the first predetermined effect process, a predetermined effect is started when a predetermined condition is satisfied triggered by the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol.

  In the first predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU checks whether a first predetermined effect in-execution flag indicating that the first predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU checks whether a second predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the second predetermined effect is being executed is set ( Step S732). If the second predetermined effect executing flag is set, the process ends. If the second predetermined effect in-progress flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S741.

  If the first predetermined effect executing flag is set in step S731 (that is, if the first predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU measures the effect period of the first predetermined effect. The value of the first predetermined effect timer for doing this is decremented by one (step S734). When the value of the first predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S735), the first predetermined effect is ended (step S736). Further, the CPU for effect control resets the flag under execution of the first predetermined effect (step S737).

  If the value of the first predetermined effect timer is not 0, it is determined in the process of step S 759 A that “predetermined effect (○)” is determined to be executed, the effect control CPU ends the opening of the normal electric combination product It is confirmed whether or not the designated command has been received (step S738). In step S738, the CPU for effect control sets, as a confirmation target, an ordinary electric jack combination release end designation command transmitted first after receiving the ordinary symbol variation end designation command. That is, the command related to the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 is to be confirmed (when the normal electric combination release end specification command transmitted after the second time is received, the command is not received in step S738) ). When the CPU for effect control has received the normal electric character product open end designation command, if the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is being executed, the notification image 9 d (see FIG. 62 (F) is displayed, and if the predetermined effect of the dice mode is being executed, the notification image 9n (refer to FIG. 66 (6)) is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709 (step S739). In addition, whether the mode of the predetermined effect is the roulette mode or the dice mode, specifically, starts the execution of the second predetermined effect or when setting the first predetermined effect executing flag in step S780 described later When the second predetermined effect executing flag is set, information capable of specifying an aspect or effect color of the predetermined effect set when setting the flag, or a predetermined bit of the first predetermined effect executing flag or the second predetermined effect executing flag It can be determined by checking.

  In addition, when the value of the first predetermined effect timer is not 0, the effect control CPU receives, for example, an ordinary symbol fluctuation start designation (hit) command and then an ordinary symbol fluctuation end designation command is received. Based on this, if the predetermined effect in the roulette mode is being executed, an image 9c (see FIG. 62E) suggesting that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters. If it is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 709, and the predetermined effect of the dice mode is being executed, the image 9m suggests that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters. A process of stopping and displaying (see FIG. 66 (5)) on the display screen of the effect display device 709 is also performed. In addition, whether the mode of the predetermined effect is the roulette mode or the dice mode, specifically, starts the execution of the second predetermined effect or when setting the first predetermined effect executing flag in step S780 described later When the second predetermined effect executing flag is set, information capable of specifying an aspect or effect color of the predetermined effect set when setting the flag, or a predetermined bit of the first predetermined effect executing flag or the second predetermined effect executing flag It can be determined by checking.

  Since it is informed that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in the open state when the normal motorized role material release end designation command transmitted first is received, substantially the second variable winning ball device 715 Is reported to be controlled to the open state. In this embodiment, the second variable winning ball apparatus 715 has a long open period. Therefore, by the notification being executed, the player's expectation for the variable winning ball device 715 to be controlled to the open state in the low base state can be enhanced.

  If the microcomputer for game control 7560 is configured to transmit the normal motorized combination opening end designation command only at the end of the last opening among the opening of the variable winning prize ball device 715 a plurality of times, an effect is provided. After the control CPU receives the normal symbol variation end designation command in the process of step S 738, a predetermined time (for example, a time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) has passed or not If it passes, the process of step S739 may be executed. In addition, after the effect control CPU receives the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command, whether or not a predetermined time (for example, a time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) has elapsed. If it passes, the process of step S739 may be executed. Furthermore, when the microcomputer for game control 7560 is configured to transmit the "hit game start command" when starting the hit game based on the fact that the display result of the normal symbol is the hit symbol, the effect is produced. After the control CPU receives the "hit game start command", it checks whether a predetermined time (for example, the time until the first opening of the variable winning ball device 715 ends) has elapsed and has elapsed In this case, the process of step S739 may be performed.

  In step S741, the CPU for effect control is set with a flag indicating that there is a next change (a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect during the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol to be started next). Check if it is. If the next variation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S761.

  If the flag with the next change is not set, the CPU for effect control is in operation while the unchanged period measurement timer (timer for measuring the period when the change (variable display) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not started) It is confirmed whether it is (not 0) (step S742). If the non-variable period measurement timer is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S751. In addition, since the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol are synchronized with each other, hereinafter, the variation of the special symbol will be described as an example.

  When the non-variation period measurement timer is in operation, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started (step S743). Whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process or the decorative symbol variation process. If the variation of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If the variation of the special symbol is not started, the effect control CPU decrements the value of the non-variation period measurement timer by 1 (step S744). Then, when the value of the non-variation period measurement timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S771 (step S745). If the value of the non-fluctuation period measurement timer is not 0, the process ends.

  In step S751, the CPU for effect control receives the normal symbol variation start designation command indicating that the normal symbol variation start designation command (the normal symbol variation start designation (per hit) command or the normal symbol variation start designation (off) command) is received. It is checked whether a flag (normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or a normal symbol variation start designation (drop) command reception flag) is set. If it is not set, the process ends.

  If the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the gaming state data is a value indicating the high base state (step S752). If the value indicates the high base state, the process ends.

  If the value does not indicate the high base state, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (including a small hit gaming state) (step S753). Whether or not the jackpot gaming state, for example, is confirmed by the value of the effect control process flag. In that case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is in the jackpot gaming state, the process ends.

  When it is not the big hit gaming state, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the symbol specifying command corresponding to the small hit is stored in the start winning time storage area storing the effect control command transmitted when the start winning is generated. (Step S754). If the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit is stored, the process is ended.

  If the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit is not stored, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S755). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol change processing or the decorative symbol change stop processing. If the special symbol is not changing, the effect control CPU checks whether one minute or more has elapsed since the ending of the special symbol change (step S757).

  In addition, for example, the timer for measuring the time after the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol is prepared, and the determination process of step S757 is implement | achieved by confirming the measured value of the timer. If one minute or more has passed since the end of the variation of the special symbol, the processing is ended. If the time after the end of the variation of the special symbol is less than one minute, the process proceeds to step S759A.

  In addition, when one minute or more has passed since the end of the change of the special symbol, the process is considered to be continued for a while after the end of the change of the special symbol. It is for. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low base state is 10 seconds, and the upper limit of the number of gate passing memories (the number of general drawing reservation memories) is 4, so from [4 × 10 seconds] This is because it may be considered better to execute the process of step S759A until a slightly more time has passed.

  If the special symbol is being changed, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not a predetermined time (11.5 in this example) has elapsed from the start of the change (step S758). If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process ends.

  In this embodiment, when the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbol is executed according to the variation pattern in which the super reach effect is to be executed, the super reach effect is started 11.5 seconds after the start of the variation.

  If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the effect control CPU determines the presence / absence of the first predetermined effect and the notification result (step S759A). In addition, the elapsed time from the fluctuation | variation start is determined by the value of the fluctuation time timer set during execution of the fluctuation | variation display of a production | presentation pattern (decoration pattern), for example.

  In step S759A, the CPU for effect control determines the presence / absence of the first predetermined effect and the notification result (which notification result is to be used) using, for example, the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG.

  In the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 73, when the display result of the normal symbol is an out symbol (corresponding to when the normal symbol fluctuation start designation (off) command reception flag is set) and the display of the normal symbol A judgment value corresponding to not performing a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect according to each of the cases in which the result is hit and the symbol is set (corresponding to when the symbol change start designation (hit) command reception flag is set). A determination value corresponding to performing (x), a determination value corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (o), and a determination corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (o) after a predetermined effect (x) A value is set. In addition, the predetermined effect (x) is a predetermined effect notifying that the reach effect is not executed and the variable winning ball device 715 is not controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters (passes) (notice result of loss), The predetermined effect (○) is a predetermined effect notifying that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in a state where the game ball easily enters (passes). In addition, the determination value corresponding to performing at least the predetermined effect may be set in the first predetermined effect determination table. Further, FIG. 73 shows not the determination values themselves but the number of determination values.

  Then, in the processing shown in step S759A, the configuration of the predetermined effect processing of FIGS. 33 and 36 shown in the first embodiment is applied, and the predetermined effect (coin) can be determined in addition to the predetermined effect shown in FIG. If a coin has been acquired, it may be configured to be able to notify that there is an acquired coin in a predetermined effect.

  In addition, in addition to the aspect of the "informing content" shown in FIG. 73 instead of the aspect of the "informing content" (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 73, you may use another aspect. For example, an image in the form of a card lamp (red light for emergency) generally used for definite variation confirmation notification, a character image used in step-up notice effect for giving notice of a display result of a special symbol, or a big hit notification You may use the image for, etc. as another aspect. In the case of using them, an effect in which the predetermined variation is interlocked with the definite variation confirmation notification, the step-up notice effect, the big hit notification and the like is realized.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73, even in the case of per common drawing, it is configured such that the predetermined effect may not be executed at a low rate of 10%, but in the case of per common distribution. The predetermined effect may be performed at a rate of 100%.

  In the process of step S759A, the CPU for effect control extracts the random number for predetermined effect determination for determining the presence or absence of the predetermined effect and the notification result, and the random number for predetermined effect determination corresponds to the execution of the predetermined effect. If one of the two matches, it is decided to execute a predetermined effect. In addition, CPU for production control uses the decision value regarding the “normal symbol off” in the first predetermined effect determination table when the normal symbol fluctuation start designated (displaced) command reception flag is set, the normal symbol fluctuation When the start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the determination value relating to "per normal symbol" in the first predetermined effect determination table is used.

  Next, the CPU for effect control determines the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color (step S759B). Then, the process proceeds to step S764. However, if it is determined in step S759A that the first predetermined effect is not to be executed, the effect control CPU proceeds to step S764 without directly determining the mode of the first predetermined effect or the effect color in step S759B. Do.

  In step S759B, the CPU for effect control determines whether the mode of the first predetermined effect is to be the roulette mode or the dice mode, using the first predetermined effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 74A, for example. .

  In the first predetermined effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 74 (A), when the display result of the normal symbol is the off symbol (corresponding to the case where the normal symbol variation start designation (off) command reception flag is set) If it is determined that the display result of the normal symbol is the winning symbol (corresponding to the case where the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set), the judgment value corresponding to the roulette form is selected. The judgment value corresponding to the dice form is set. Note that FIG. 74 (A) shows not the determination values themselves but the number of determination values.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (A), in this embodiment, when the symbol is usually out of alignment, A1 decision value is allocated to the roulette mode and B1 decision value is allocated to the dice mode, Determination values are assigned such that A1 <B1 (A1 + B1 = 100). In addition, when it comes to a normal symbol, the judgment value is allocated to A2 pieces for the roulette mode and the judgment value is allocated to B2 pieces for the dice form, so that A2> B2 (A2 + B2 = 100) Is allocated. Then, in this embodiment, when the first predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode, the variable winning ball device 715 is a hit per common drawing as compared with the case where the first predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode. Judgment values are assigned such that the expectation for being controlled to a state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter is high.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability (X1) that the roulette mode is executed when the normal symbol is out is, for example, the average probability (XA1 (for example, per normal symbol) that the normal symbol is out of position Probability (XB1 (in this example, the determination value set in the table of FIG. 73) is determined that the predetermined effect is executed when the symbol is out of alignment, which is determined by referring to the number of determination values etc. set in the determination table). It can be obtained by multiplying A / 10/100 from the number) and further multiplying by A1 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (A). In addition, the probability (X2) when the roulette mode is executed when it becomes a normal symbol hit is, for example, the average probability that becomes a normal symbol hit (XA2 (for example, the number of judgment values set in the normal symbol hit judgment table etc.) ), And the probability that the predetermined effect will be executed when the symbol is normal (XB2 (in this example, it is determined to be 90/100 from the number of determination values set in the table of FIG. 73))) , And further multiplied by A2 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (A). Therefore, the expectation (XT1) for the variable winning ball device 715 to be controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters is the normal symbol hit when the first predetermined effect of the roulette mode appears, X2 / (X1 + X2) It is obtained by calculation.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the probability (Y1) that the dice pattern is executed when the normal symbol is out is, for example, predetermined to the average probability (XA1) that the normal symbol is out, when the normal symbol is out It is determined by multiplying the probability (XB1 (in this example, 10/100)) that the effect will be executed and further multiplying B1 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (A). In addition, the probability (Y2) that dice pattern is executed when it becomes a normal symbol hit is, for example, the probability that a predetermined effect is executed when a normal symbol is hit, to the average probability (XA2) that a normal symbol is hit. It is obtained by multiplying (XB2 (in this example, 90/100)) and further multiplying by B2 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (A). Therefore, when the first predetermined effect of the dice form appears, it is a normal symbol hit, and the expectation (YT1) for the variable winning ball device 715 to be controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters is Y2 / (Y1 + Y2). It is obtained by calculation.

  And, in this embodiment, when the first predetermined effect of the roulette mode calculated in the above procedure appears, it is normally hit and the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters. The degree of expectation (XT1) is a normal symbol hit when the first predetermined effect of the dice form appears and is higher than the degree of expectation (YT1) that the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters The values of the probabilities XA1, XA2, XB1 and XB2 are designed so that the degree of expectation is higher when the first predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode, and the allocation numbers of A1, A2, B1 and B2 are determined It is done.

  In addition, allocation of the determination value shown to FIG. 74 (A) is an example, for example, when it comes to an ordinary symbol, it is determined that it is determined as a roulette mode at a ratio of 100%, or when an ordinary symbol is deviated. In this case, the dice may be determined at a rate of 100%. Also, for example, when the first predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode, the game winning ball is hit and the variable winning ball device 715 enters the game, as compared to the case where the first predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode. The determination value may be allocated so that the expectation for being controlled to the easy state is high.

  In the process of step S759B, the CPU for effect control extracts a random number for determining a predetermined effect mode for determining an aspect of the predetermined effect, and the random number for determining the predetermined effect mode is any one of the determination values corresponding to the aspect of the predetermined effect. If they match, it is determined that the mode of the predetermined effect is the roulette mode or the dice mode. In addition, CPU for production control uses the decision value regarding the “normal symbol off” in the first predetermined effect mode determination table when the normal symbol fluctuation start designated (displaced) command reception flag is set, the normal symbol When the change start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the determination value regarding “per normal symbol” in the first predetermined effect mode determination table is used.

  In step S759B, the CPU for effect control determines the effect color of the first predetermined effect, for example, using the first predetermined effect color determination table shown in FIG. 74 (B).

  The first predetermined effect color determination table shown in FIG. 74B corresponds to the determination value corresponding to the effect color of the first predetermined effect being red and the effect color of the first predetermined effect being blue. The judgment value to be set is set. In FIG. 74 (B), not the determination values themselves but the number of determination values are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (B), in this embodiment, when the first predetermined effect is executed, C1 pieces of determination values are assigned to the effect color (red) and the effect color (blue) is applied. The judgment value is assigned D1 and the judgment value is assigned such that C1> D1 (C1 + D1 = 100). And, as will be specifically described later, in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color, Judgment values are assigned such that the rate at which the notification of whether or not the first variable effect ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters is controlled is high.

  The allocation of the determination values shown in FIG. 74B is an example, and for example, when the first predetermined effect is executed, the effect color may be determined to be red at a rate of 100%. . In addition, for example, the determination value may be allocated such that the proportion in which the effect color is determined to be blue is high when the first predetermined effect is executed.

  In the process of step S759B, the CPU for effect control extracts a predetermined effect color determination random number for determining the effect color of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect color determination random number is a determination value corresponding to the effect color of the predetermined effect. If one of the two matches, it is determined that the effect color of the predetermined effect is red or blue.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74, although the case where the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color are determined by separate lottery processing using separate tables is shown, the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color are The processing method to be determined is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, by executing one lottery process using one table in which the combination of the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color is set, the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color are determined collectively You may do it.

  Further, the effect control CPU resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag when executing the processing of step S759B. In addition, also when it determines with "Y" by step S733, CPU for production control resets the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command reception flag, when the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set. In addition, the CPU for effect control, even when it does not shift to the processing of step S759B because it is determined as "Y" in steps S752, S753, S754, S757, S758, the normal symbol fluctuation start designation command being set Reset the reception flag.

  In step S761, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started. Whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started is determined, for example, by the value of the effect control process flag. If the variation of the special symbol is not started, the value of the effect shortening timer (timer for determining the degree of shortening of the effect period of the predetermined effect) is incremented by 1 (step S762). If the variation of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  In step S764, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not it is decided to execute the first predetermined effect. In the process of step S759A, it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect. If it is not determined to execute the first predetermined effect, the process ends.

  If it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the special symbol is in the process of being changed (step S765). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol change processing or the decorative symbol change stop processing. If the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step S770. If the special symbol is being changed, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the change pattern is out of reach or not (step S766). When the fluctuation pattern includes reach effect, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If the variation pattern is out of reach, then the CPU for effect control controls the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol (for example, the variation time timer set during execution of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) Check if the value specified in the value is shorter than the normal symbol fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds: equivalent to the time it takes for the variable winning ball device to be controlled to enter the gaming ball easily) Step S767). If not short, the process proceeds to step S771. In addition, the CPU for effect control may check whether or not the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of the normal symbol.

  If the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol is short, the CPU for effect control has a pending storage (at least the value of the first pending storage number counter or the value of the second pending storage number counter is not 0) It is confirmed whether or not (step S768). If there is no pending storage, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If there is a pending storage, the CPU for effect control sets the next variation present flag (step S769).

  In step S 770, the CPU for effect control sets a value equivalent to a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) to the non-variation period measurement timer.

  In step S771, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the next variation present flag is set. If the next variation flag is set, a predetermined effect pattern is selected according to the value of the effect shortening timer (see steps S741, S761 and S762) (step S772). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern having a period obtained by subtracting the value of the effect shortening timer from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. 61 as the effect period. The period to be shortened is the period of the result notification effect shown in FIG.

  If the next variation flag is not set, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the value of the non-variation period measurement timer (see steps S742, S743, and S744) is 0 (step S773). . When the value of the non-variation period measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU selects a predetermined effect pattern according to the value of the non-variation period measurement timer (step S774). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined to be a pattern having an effect period that is a period obtained by subtracting the value of the timer for measurement of non-variation period from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. In addition, the period shortened is a period of the result alerting | reporting presentation shown by FIG.

  If the value of the non-variation period measurement timer is 0 (the non-variation period measurement timer has timed out), the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the special symbol is being varied (step S775) ). If the special symbol is changing, the effect control CPU selects a predetermined effect pattern to be started from the second period (see FIG. 61) (step S776). If the special symbol is not changing, the effect control CPU selects a predetermined effect pattern to be started from the first period (see FIG. 61) (step S777).

  Next, the CPU for effect control sets a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the determined pattern of the predetermined effect in the first predetermined effect timer (step S778). Then, the CPU for effect control starts the first predetermined effect (step S779) and sets the flag under the execution of the first predetermined effect (step S780).

  In addition, when setting the flag during execution of the first predetermined effect, information which can also specify the notification result of the first predetermined effect is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the notification result is "x", a flag indicating that the notification result is "o", and indicating that a predetermined effect (o) is to be executed after the predetermined effect (x) A flag may be set. Also, for example, when the first predetermined effect executing flag is configured by a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value specifying which notification result is to be a predetermined bit of the first predetermined effect executing flag By setting, it may be possible to specify which notification result is obtained.

  In addition, when the first predetermined effect executing flag is set, information that can also specify the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color is also stored in the RAM. As an example, a flag indicating that the aspect of the first predetermined effect is a roulette aspect or a flag indicating that it is a dice aspect, a flag indicating that the effect color of the first predetermined effect is red, or a blue color Set the flag. In addition, for example, when the first predetermined effect executing flag is configured with a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), the first predetermined effect mode or the effect color is designated as the predetermined bit of the first predetermined effect executing flag. By setting the value to be set, the aspect of the first predetermined effect and the effect color may be specified.

  In this embodiment, specifically, the first predetermined effect is realized by executing the effect control according to the data set in the process table (however, the display control of the notification image shown in FIG. 62) except for). In that case, the CPU for effect control selects the process table corresponding to the determined pattern of the predetermined effect in the process of step S779, and the effect display device 709 using the data set in the selected process table. Start display control etc. Each process table is stored in advance in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (step S810B). In the second predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU first confirms whether or not a new change category command (effect control command indicating a pre-read determination result of change pattern type) has been received (step S5201). When a new change category command is received, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the first predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5202). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU checks whether the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5203). If the second predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU checks whether a second predetermined effect determining flag indicating that the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined is set. (Step S5204).

  If the second predetermined effect determination flag is not set either, the effect control CPU checks whether the next variation present flag is set (step S5205). If the next variation presence flag is not set, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the non-variation period measurement timer is in operation (not 0) (step S5206).

  If the non-fluctuation period measurement timer is not in operation, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the gaming state data is a value indicating the high base state (step S5207). If the value indicates the high base state, the process ends.

  When the value does not indicate the high base state, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (including a small hit gaming state) (step S5208). Whether or not the jackpot gaming state, for example, is confirmed by the value of the effect control process flag. In that case, it is assumed that the effect control CPU is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is in the jackpot gaming state, the process ends.

  If it is not the jackpot gaming state, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the newly received fluctuation category command indicates the judgment result of the super reach loss or the super reach jackpot (step S5209). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the received variation category command indicates a variation type of super reach loss or super reach jackpot.

  Next, the CPU for effect control checks whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress (step S5210a). In addition, it is checked whether the normal symbol variation in progress flag set based on the fact that the normal symbol variation start designation command is received is set or not whether the normal symbol variation display is in progress or not It can judge by doing. If it is not during the variation display of the normal symbol, it proceeds to step S5212 as it is without shifting to step S5210b. By performing the process of step S5210a, in this embodiment, the process may proceed to the process of step S5210b or later only when the variation display of the normal symbol is also performed, and the second predetermined effect may be performed.

  Then, the CPU for effect control, as a second predetermined effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the second predetermined effect and the notification result, at the time of winning determination result (super reach out or super reach big hit) and the total number of pending storage A predetermined effect determination table corresponding to the selected is selected (step S5210 b).

  Further, the CPU for effect control performs determination of the presence / absence of the second predetermined effect and the notification result using the second predetermined effect determination table selected in the process of step S5210 b (step S5211 a).

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing a second predetermined effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, in the second predetermined effect determination table, a determination value corresponding to not performing a predetermined effect in association with the winning determination result and the total number of pending storages, and a predetermined effect A determination value corresponding to performing (x), a determination value corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (chance), and a determination value corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (superheat) are set. There is.

  Then, in the processing shown in step S5211a, the configuration of the predetermined effect processing of FIG. 33 and FIG. 36 shown in the first embodiment is applied, and the predetermined effect (coin) can be determined in addition to the predetermined effect shown in FIG. If a coin has been acquired, it may be configured to be able to notify that there is an acquired coin in a predetermined effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the predetermined effect (superheat) with the highest degree of expectation for the specific effect is compared with the case of the super reach being lost. The rate is determined at a high rate, and the execution rate of the predetermined effect (superheat) increases as the total number of pending storages increases. In this embodiment, as described later, in each of the variable display before the start of the variable display in which the second predetermined effect is carried out, the prefetch advance notice effect is carried out (that is, it becomes the notification result of the disconnection but (Predetermined effect) is executed, but the number of pre-read advance notice effects is executed more by the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (superheat) being increased as the total number of pending storage increases. The expectation for the specific effect (in this example, the super reach effect) to appear can be enhanced.

  Next, the CPU for effect control determines the mode of the second predetermined effect and the effect color (step S5211 b). Then, the process proceeds to step S5212. However, if it is determined in step S5211a not to execute the second predetermined effect, the effect control CPU proceeds to step S5212 without performing the determination of the second predetermined effect or the effect color in step S5211b. Do.

  In step S5211 b, the CPU for effect control determines, for example, using the second predetermined effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 77A whether the second predetermined effect mode is the roulette mode or the dice mode. .

  In the second predetermined effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 77 (A), a judgment value corresponding to setting to the roulette mode and dice depending on each of the case of the super reach being lost and the case of the super reach big hit. A determination value corresponding to the setting is set. FIG. 77 (A) shows the number of judgment values, not the judgment values themselves.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in this embodiment, when the super reach is lost, A3 pieces of judgment values are assigned to the roulette aspect and B3 pieces of judgment values are assigned to the dice aspect, Determination values are assigned such that A3 <B3 (A3 + B3 = 100). In the case of a super reach jackpot, A4 pieces of judgment value are allocated to the roulette aspect, and B4 pieces of judgment value are assigned to the dice aspect, so that A4> B4 (A4 + B4 = 100). Is allocated. And, in this embodiment, when the second predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode, “intensified as a notification result of the second predetermined effect as compared with the case where the second predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode. The judgment value is assigned such that the heat is stopped and the expectation of becoming a super reach jackpot is high.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability (X3) that the roulette mode is executed when the super reach is lost is, for example, the average probability (XA3 (for example, the big hit determination table) that is the super reach lost. Or a large hit type determination table, a variation pattern type determination table, the number of determinations set in the variation pattern determination table, etc.)), the average probability that a predetermined effect is executed when It is determined by multiplying XB3 (for example, determined by referring to the determination number set in the table of FIG. 76) and further multiplying by A3 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (A). In addition, the probability (X4) that the roulette mode is executed when becoming a super reach jackpot is, for example, an average probability (for example, a big hit determination table or a big hit type determination table, a variation pattern type determination Average probability (XB4 (for example, set in the table shown in FIG. 76) that a predetermined effect is executed in the case of a super reach jackpot) obtained by referring to the table, the number of judgments set in the fluctuation pattern judgment table, etc. (Determined with reference to the determined number of judgments etc.)), and further calculated by multiplying A4 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (A). Therefore, when the second predetermined effect in the roulette mode appears, the expectation (XT2) for the "superheat" to be stopped and displayed and to become the super reach jackpot is obtained by calculating X4 / (X3 + X4).

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the probability (Y3) that the dice aspect is executed when the super reach is lost is, for example, a predetermined average probability (XA3) when the super reach is lost when the super reach is lost. It is determined by multiplying the average probability (XB3) for performing rendering and further multiplying B3 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (A). Moreover, the probability (Y4) that the dice aspect is executed when becoming a super reach jackpot is, for example, an average probability (XA4) that becomes a super reach jackpot, an average when a predetermined effect is executed when a super reach jackpot It can be determined by multiplying the average probability (XB4) and further multiplying by B4 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (A). Therefore, when the second predetermined effect of the dice form appears, the "superheat" is stopped and displayed, and the expectation (YT2) for becoming a super reach jackpot is obtained by calculating Y4 / (Y3 + Y4).

  Then, in this embodiment, when the second predetermined effect of the roulette mode calculated in the above procedure appears, “superheat” is stopped and displayed, and the degree of expectation (XT2) for becoming a super reach jackpot is "Heating fever" is stopped and displayed when the second predetermined effect of the dice aspect appears, and it is higher than the expectation (YT2) for becoming a super reach jackpot, and the second predetermined effect is executed in the roulette aspect The values of the probabilities XA3, XA4, XB3 and XB4 are designed so that the degree of expectation is higher, and the allocation numbers of A3, A4, B3 and B4 are determined.

  The allocation of the determination values shown in FIG. 77A is an example, and for example, in the case of a super reach jackpot, it is determined that the roulette mode is determined at a rate of 100%, or the super reach is lost. In this case, the dice may be determined at a rate of 100%. In addition, for example, when the second predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode, the "superheat" stop display as a notification result of the second predetermined effect than when the second predetermined effect is executed in the roulette mode You may assign a judgment value so that the expectation for becoming a super reach big hit becomes high.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the ratio of the predetermined effect (excessive heat) to be executed when the super reach big hit is high, whereas the predetermined effect (the super reach is lost). When the ratio that the chance is executed is high and the second predetermined effect is executed in the dice mode, it is shown that the ratio in which “chance” is stopped and displayed is increased as the notification result of the second predetermined effect. However, when the second reach effect is performed in a dice manner by increasing the rate at which the predetermined effect (x) is executed when the super reach is lost, "x" is given as the notification result of the second predetermined effect. You may comprise so that the ratio by which stop display is carried out may become high.

  In the process of step S5211b, the CPU for effect control extracts a random number for determining the predetermined effect mode, and the random number for determining the predetermined effect mode corresponds to any of the determination values corresponding to the predetermined effect mode, and the aspect of the predetermined effect It is decided to make the roulette aspect or the dice aspect. In addition, CPU for production control uses the decision value regarding "super reach out" in the second predetermined effect mode determination table, when the determination result at the time of winning is out of the super reach, and the determination at the time of winning is the super reach big hit If it is, the determination value regarding "super reach big hit" in the second predetermined effect mode determination table is used.

  In step S5211 b, the CPU for effect control determines an effect color of the second predetermined effect, for example, using a second predetermined effect color determination table shown in FIG. 77 (B).

  The second predetermined effect color determination table shown in FIG. 77B corresponds to the determination value corresponding to setting the effect color of the second predetermined effect to red and setting the effect color of the second predetermined effect to blue. The judgment value to be set is set. In FIG. 77 (B), not the determination values themselves but the number of determination values are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (B), in this embodiment, when the second predetermined effect is executed, C2 decision values are assigned to the effect color (red) and the effect color (blue) is applied. The determination value is assigned D2 and the determination value is assigned such that C2 <D2 (C2 + D2 = 100). And in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color, the second predetermined effect is executed compared to when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color, and the second predetermined effect is executed. Judgment values are assigned such that the rate at which notification of whether or not to reach a big hit is performed is high. Further, as described in FIG. 74 (B), in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color. The determination value is assigned such that the rate at which notification of whether or not the first variable effect ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters is performed is high.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, a red effect is produced when it is notified whether the first predetermined effect is executed and the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters. The probability (S1) that the color is selected is, for example, the probability (XB1 (in this example, 10/100) that the predetermined effect is executed when the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern to the average probability (XA1) that the symbol is out ), And a value obtained by multiplying C1 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (B), and an average probability (XA2) per symbol per symbol, predetermined per symbol per symbol Calculated by multiplying the probability (XB2 (in this example, 90/100)) by which the effect will be executed, and further adding a value obtained by multiplying C1 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (B). Be In addition, the probability (T1) that a blue effect color is selected when notification of whether the first predetermined effect is executed and the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters is performed (T1) For example, the average probability (XA1) at which the symbol usually deviates is multiplied by the probability (XB1 (in this example, 10/100)) that the predetermined effect is executed when the symbol is off normally, and further, FIG. B) the probability obtained by multiplying the symbol D1 / 100 and the average probability (XA2) per symbol per symbol, the probability (XB2 (this symbol) that a predetermined effect is executed per symbol per symbol In the example, it is obtained by multiplying 90/100)) and further adding a value obtained by multiplying D1 / 100 with reference to FIG. 74 (B).

  Further, in this embodiment, the probability (S2) of selection of the effect color of red when the second predetermined effect is executed and notification of whether or not the super reach big hit is performed is, for example, the occurrence of the super reach Is multiplied by the average probability (XB3) at which the predetermined effect is executed when the super reach is out, and is further multiplied by C2 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (B). And the average probability (XA4) to be the super reach jackpot are multiplied by the average probability (XB4) that the predetermined effect is executed in the case of the super reach jackpot, as shown in FIG. 77 (B). And C.sub.2 / 100 and the value obtained by multiplying C.sub.2 / 100. In addition, the probability (T2) that the blue effect color is selected when notification of whether the second predetermined effect is performed and the super reach big hit is performed is, for example, an average probability that the super reach is lost A value obtained by multiplying (XA3) by an average probability (XB3) at which a predetermined effect is executed when the super reach is out, and further multiplying by D2 / 100 with reference to FIG. 77 (B) The average probability (XA4) to be the super reach jackpot is multiplied by the average probability (XB4) that the predetermined effect is executed at the time of the super reach jackpot, and further referring to FIG. 77 (B), D2 / It is obtained by adding the value obtained by multiplying 100 and the value.

  Then, in this embodiment, the probability (ST1) that the first predetermined effect is executed when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color is the probability that the first predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color (ST1) It is calculated by the probability (S1 + S2) that a predetermined effect (a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect) is executed in S1) / red effect color. On the other hand, the probability (TT1) that the first predetermined effect is executed when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color is the probability that the first predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color (T1) / blue effect It is determined by the probability (T1 + T2) that a predetermined effect (a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect) is executed in color. And in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color calculated in the above procedure, the probability (ST1) that the first predetermined effect is executed is the predetermined effect with the blue effect color. The first predetermined effect is executed in the case where the predetermined effect is executed with the red effect color, which is higher than the probability (TT1) that the first predetermined effect is executed when executed, and the variable winning ball device 715 is executed. The values of probability XA1, XA2, XA3, XA4, XB1, XB2, XB3 and XB4 are designed so that the rate at which the notification of whether or not the game ball is controlled to enter easily is high is high, C1 , C2, D1, and D2 are determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, the probability (ST2) that the second predetermined effect is executed when the predetermined effect is executed in the red effect color is the probability that the second predetermined effect is executed in the red effect color (ST2) S2) / It is determined by the probability (S1 + S2) that a predetermined effect (a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect) is executed with the effect color of red. On the other hand, the probability (TT2) that the second predetermined effect is executed when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color is the probability that the second predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color (T2) / blue effect It is determined by the probability (T1 + T2) that a predetermined effect (a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect) is executed in color. And in this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color calculated in the above procedure, the probability (TT2) that the second predetermined effect is executed is the predetermined effect with the red effect color. If the predetermined effect is executed with the blue effect color, which is higher than the probability (ST2) that the second predetermined effect is executed when it is executed, the second predetermined effect is executed and becomes a super reach big hit The values of the probabilities XA1, XA2, XA3, XA4, XB1, XB2, XB3 and XB4 are designed so that the ratio of notification of whether or not is higher, and the allocation numbers of C1, C2, D1 and D2 are determined. ing.

  Allocation of the determination value shown in FIG. 77 (B) is an example, and for example, when the second predetermined effect is executed, the effect color may be determined to be blue at a rate of 100%. . In addition, for example, the determination value may be allocated such that the proportion in which the effect color is determined to be red is high when the second predetermined effect is executed.

  In the process of step S5211b, the CPU for effect control extracts the random number for determining the predetermined effect color (see FIG. 42), and the random number for determining the predetermined effect color matches any of the determination values corresponding to the effect color of the predetermined effect It is determined that the effect color of the predetermined effect is red or blue.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77, although the case where the aspect of the second predetermined effect and the effect color are determined by separate lottery processing using separate tables is shown, the aspect of the second predetermined effect and the effect color are The processing method to be determined is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, by executing one lottery process using one table in which the combination of the aspect of the second predetermined effect and the effect color is set, the aspect of the second predetermined effect and the effect color are determined collectively You may do it.

  Next, the CPU for effect control executes pre-reading notice determination processing for determining the presence or absence and the mode of pre-reading advance notice effect (step S5212).

  When the effect control CPU determines to execute the second predetermined effect, the effect control CPU sets a second predetermined effect determination flag (steps S5213, S5214).

  When the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, information that can also specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect is stored in the RAM. As an example, a flag indicating that the notification result is "x", a flag indicating that the notification result is "chance", and a flag indicating that the notification result is "excessive heat" are set. Also, for example, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is configured with a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value specifying which notification result is to be specified is set to the predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect determination flag By doing this, it may be possible to identify which notification result.

  Further, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, information capable of specifying the mode of the second predetermined effect and the effect color is also stored in the RAM. As an example, a flag indicating that the aspect of the second predetermined effect is a roulette aspect or a flag indicating that it is a dice aspect, a flag indicating that the effect color of the second predetermined effect is red, or a blue color Set the flag. In addition, for example, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is configured by a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value for specifying the second predetermined effect aspect or effect color in the predetermined bits of the second predetermined effect determination flag By setting, the aspect of the second predetermined effect and the effect color may be specified.

  Next, the CPU for effect control sets the total number of pending storages in the first variation number counter (step S5215). The first fluctuation number counter is a counter for counting the number of fluctuation displays to be executed until the fluctuation display including the second predetermined effect is started. In this embodiment, when the determination of the execution of the second predetermined effect is performed during the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the first change number counter is set in step S5215, the execution is first performed The value of the first variation count counter is decremented by 1 at the end of the middle variation display (see step S8312), and as a result, the first variation count counter is displayed up to the previous variation display of the variation display including the second predetermined effect. The value is 0. In step S5215, when the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the effect control CPU sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current total number of pending storages in the first variation number counter. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the value of the first variation count counter equal to 0 by all means up to the next variable display before the variable display including the second predetermined effect.

  Thereafter, each time the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed, the value of the first variation number counter is decremented by one. Then, when the value of the first fluctuation number counter becomes 0, the second predetermined effect is executed in the next fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, and the second predetermined effect executing flag is set.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, by applying the configuration shown in the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machine 700, as in the first embodiment, the game related information is output. If the setting is performed, the rate at which the benefit is given advantageously and the notification that the benefit is given by the suggestion effect is also high, so the player who is setting for outputting the game related information In addition, it is possible to improve the interest concerning granting of benefits.

  In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters as an advantageous gaming state in the suggested effect (predetermined effect in this example), or becomes a super reach, Although the case of notifying that it is a super reach big hit has been shown, the advantageous gaming state notified in the suggestion effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, it may be configured to be able to be notified in a suggestion effect that becoming a big hit as an advantageous gaming state, becoming a definite change state, becoming a short time state, becoming a high base state. In addition, for example, it may be configured to be able to notify in the suggestion effect that the player has been elected to the sudden big hit or small hit suddenly. Furthermore, for example, it may be configured to be able to be notified in the suggested effect that the pseudo-links occur.

  As described above, the contents of Embodiment 1 can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 700. Similarly, the contents of Embodiment 2 can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine 700.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications can of course be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.

[Modification]
In addition, it is possible to configure the gaming system, the gaming machine, and the management device by variously combining the configurations shown in the first embodiment. FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for describing a combination pattern of configurations in the gaming system.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the gaming system shown in the first embodiment, (1) the gaming machine outputs a two-dimensional code, and (2) the gaming machine imparts a coin (any one of gold, silver and copper) , (5) the server determines the item, and (6) the server grants the item.

  The combination patterns of the constituent elements (1) to (6) shown in FIG. 78 can be considered to be modifications 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 78 in addition to those shown in the first embodiment. For example, the gaming system shown in the first modification includes four components of (1), (2), (4) and (6) among the components of (1) to (6). Further, the gaming system shown in the modification 2 includes four components of (1), (3), (5) and (6) among the components of (1) to (6).

  Each component of the gaming system shown in the first embodiment is a configuration for outputting at least a two-dimensional code to be provided on the slot machine 1 side, and a configuration for providing an item on the management server 1200 side. It may be provided on either the slot machine 1 side or the management server 1200 side, except for the configuration to be provided.

  In addition, said each embodiment includes the invention shown to the following (1)-(8), and there exists an effect which is demonstrated below.

  (1) The gaming system according to the first aspect enables predetermined gaming using a gaming value (for example, a medal or gaming ball) by a player, and at the same time, the gaming result of the player (for example, the total number of games , BB, RB times, levels, experience points, effects setting information and achievement missions) information including game result information can be output in a predetermined mode (for example, two-dimensional code) (for example, slot machine 1 or pachinko gaming machine) And a management apparatus (for example, management server 1200) for managing, for each registered player, gaming information (for example, information shown in FIG. 21A) regarding a game about a gaming machine (For example, the gaming system 1001), the management device is a gaming information updating means for updating the gaming information based on the gaming result information, and the corresponding player based on the gaming information Key data (for example, password) generated based on the game information corresponding to the player according to the request of the player and the privilege giving means for giving a predetermined benefit (for example, data indicating the content data and the exchange ticket) The gaming machine includes key data receiving means for receiving an input of key data from the player, and a predetermined mode of information including game result information according to a predetermined ending operation by the player And the gaming system outputs the total game value used by the player from the total game value acquired by the player in the period from the reception of the key data to the termination operation. It is provided with difference specifying means for specifying the game value difference amount (for example, the medal difference number and the game ball difference number) which is the value obtained by subtraction, and the game value difference amount is given to the player. If it is determined that it is an advantageous result or an adverse result, and it is determined that it indicates an adverse result, the condition for providing a benefit than the case where it is determined that an advantageous result is exhibited It is characterized in that it is set to be advantageous to the user side.

  According to such a configuration, when the game is ended with a game result which is disadvantageous for the player, the condition for giving the benefit is set to be more advantageous for the player side. Therefore, even if the player loses in the game, the player can actively output the game result information and maintain the motivation to receive the award from the management device. Therefore, after the end of the game, without outputting the game result information, the occurrence of a situation where the player leaves can be reduced, and as a result, it can be expected to promote utilization of the service provided by the game system.

  Although the determination as to whether the game result is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player is based on the game value difference amount, the determination criterion is an arbitrary design matter. For example, ± 0 may be used as a reference, or a predetermined amount on the negative side or a predetermined amount on the positive side may be used as a reference. In addition, the conditions for awarding benefits are not limited to two cases where the game result is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player, and may be changed in multiple stages according to the degree of advantage or the degree of disadvantage. You may For example, when the gaming value is a medal and the gaming value difference amount is a difference number of medals, the condition is set to be most advantageous when the number is -1001 or less, and thereafter -1000 to -500 The condition for awarding the benefit may be set to be disadvantageous each time the medal difference number increases, such as the number of sheets, -500 to 0, 0 to 500, 500 to 1000, 1001 or more. .

  Further, the difference specifying means may have a configuration provided in at least one of the gaming machine and the management device. In addition, if it is determined that the game value difference amount indicates an advantageous result or an adverse result for the player, and it is determined that it indicates an adverse result, it is determined that an advantageous result is indicated. Also, it may be either a gaming machine or a management device that sets conditions for giving benefits to the player side in an advantageous manner.

(2) In the gaming system of the above (1), the difference specifying means is included in the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is a bonus value indicating the exchange value (for example, coin) when the bonus is received from the management device. Reward value data storage means (for example, stock coin storage area allocated to the RAM 91b) for storing data (for example, stock coin data), and a benefit stored in the benefit value data storage means according to the end operation Based on the exchange value indicated by the use value data, the exchange value obtainable by the player is determined, and at that time it is judged whether the game value difference amount is an advantageous result or an adverse result for the player, and an adverse result is indicated. Acquisition decision means for deciding to increase the rate at which more exchange value can be obtained than when it is determined to show an advantageous result if it is determined to be The game result output means may output information including game result information including bonus value data (for example, acquisition data) indicating exchange value determined by the acquisition determination means in a predetermined manner. Good.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine side, when the game is ended with a game result which is disadvantageous for the player, the condition for giving the privilege by increasing the proportion which can acquire many exchange values is provided. Is set to be more advantageous to the player. Thereby, the management apparatus side can easily determine the awarding of the privilege to the player based on the exchange value acquired by the player, which is included in the game information corresponding to the player.

(3) In the gaming system according to (2), the gaming machine may further include a suggestion effect means for performing suggestion effect indicating whether or not the exchange value can be obtained.

  According to such a configuration, the player's celebrity can be admired and the interest can be improved. As an example of the suggestion effect in this case, as shown in FIG. 20, in JACKPOT (jackpot), it is exchanged depending on whether or not the same number (for example, 7) is aligned with multiple digits (for example, 3 digits) There is an indication that suggests whether you can earn value. Further, at that time, for example, the degree of expectation of acquisition may be indicated by display of a background or a character, output of sound or a sound effect, or the like.

(4) In the gaming system according to (2) or (3), in the gaming machine, the acquisition determining means determines the exchange value that the player can acquire by the predetermined lottery process, and in the lottery, the game value difference amount is If it is determined that the result is disadvantageous to the player, the probability of winning may be higher than that of the case where it is determined that the advantageous result is exhibited.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to be motivated to gain exchange value and to improve interest.

(5) In the gaming system of (1), the difference specifying means is included in the gaming machine, and in the gaming machine, the game result output means is a game including the game value difference amount specified by the difference specifying means The information including the result information is output in a predetermined manner, and in the gaming information managed for each registered player in the management device, a bonus that indicates the exchange value acquired by the player when receiving the award of the bonus The value-for-use data is included, and the management device determines the exchange value that can be acquired by the player based on the game result information, and based on the determined exchange value, for the benefit included in the game information corresponding to the player When the value data is updated and it is determined that the gaming value difference amount included in the game result information is an advantageous result or an adverse result for the player, and it is determined that the disadvantageous result is shown. It may further comprise an acquisition decision means for deciding to increase the rate to earn a lot of exchange value than when it is determined that shows a favorable result.

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, since processing for the benefit value data becomes unnecessary, it is not necessary to provide a complex function.

(6) In the gaming system according to (5), in the management device, the acquisition determining means determines the exchange value that the player can acquire by the predetermined lottery process, and in the lottery, the gaming value difference amount is disadvantageous to the player If it is determined to indicate an acceptable result, the probability of winning may be higher than if it is determined to indicate an advantageous result.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to be motivated to gain exchange value and to improve interest.

(7) A gaming machine according to the second aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a slot machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine) that enables a predetermined game using a gaming value (for example, a medal or gaming ball) by a player. The player is required to input key data (for example, a password) issued from a management apparatus (for example, the management server 1200) that gives the player a predetermined benefit (for example, data indicating content data and a replacement ticket). Information related to the key data acceptance means accepted from the player and the game result of the player (for example, the total number of games, BB, RB times, level, experience value, effect setting, achievement mission, etc.) Game value difference amount which is a value obtained by subtracting the total game value used by the player from the total game value obtained by the player during the period It is advantageous to specify the number and the game ball difference number), determine whether the specified game value difference amount is an advantageous result or an adverse result for the player, and determine that it indicates an adverse result. Information including game result information for setting a condition for giving a benefit from the management device to the player side in preference to the case where it is determined to indicate the result is determined according to the ending operation. Game result output means for outputting in an aspect (for example, a two-dimensional code).

  According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the same function and effect as the gaming system of (1) above can be obtained.

(8) The management apparatus according to the third aspect of the present invention is a predetermined gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1) that enables a predetermined game using a gaming value (for example, a medal or a game ball) by a player. And a pachinko gaming machine) is a management device (for example, the management server 1200) that manages gaming information related to the gaming for each registered player, and a game about the gaming result of the player output from the gaming machine Game information updating means for updating game information based on result information, benefit giving means for providing predetermined benefits (for example, data indicating content data and exchange ticket) to a corresponding player based on game information, and game Data generation means for issuing key data (for example, a password) generated on the basis of game information corresponding to the player in response to the request of the player; Can identify the game value difference amount (for example, the number of medal differences and the game ball difference number) which is a value obtained by subtracting the total amount of game value used by the player from the total amount of game value acquired by the player Information is included, and it is determined that the game value difference amount is an advantageous result or an adverse result for the player, and an advantageous result is determined when it is determined to indicate an adverse result. It is characterized in that a condition for giving a benefit is set to be more advantageous to the player than in the case where it is determined that

  According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the same function and effect as the gaming system of (1) above can be obtained.

  Note that the invention described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine or gaming system configured as follows.

  (1) The gaming machine is a gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine 1001) capable of performing a predetermined game, and player information input for inputting player information (password) related to the player Means (a push button of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation unit such as a stick controller / display switch 56, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) and player information input means (effect switch 56, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R / Player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko game) that sets the player value (points) according to the player information (password) input by the operation button such as the push button and stick controller of the pachinko gaming machine Machine production control CPU) and the game history (the result of a game played by a player) And a privilege giving means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of pachinko gaming machine) for giving a privilege (coin) based on each generation), and the privilege giving means (sub control unit 91 / production of pachinko gaming machine) When the CPU for control consumes the player value (points) set by the player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of the pachinko gaming machine), the player value (points) It is characterized in that benefits (coins) are provided under conditions that are more preferential than in the case of non-consumption.

  According to this feature, in the case where the player value set according to the player information input by the player information input means is consumed, a condition that is more favored than the case where the player value is not consumed is used. It is possible to receive the award of That is, since the degree of preferential treatment at the time of awarding the benefit changes depending on the presence or absence of the player value, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest when receiving the award of the benefit.

  The player information related to the player may be information that can specify the player, information such as a game history which is the result of the player having played a game in the past, and the player may It may be information etc. that can identify the value assigned to it.

  In addition, in the case where the privilege giving means consumes the player value, giving a privilege under a condition that is more favored than the case where the player value is not consumed is more than the case where the player value is not consumed It is also possible to give a benefit with a high probability, to give a higher value benefit than when the player value is not consumed, to have a high probability of being given a high value benefit, or It may be a combination to be preferential.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1), the player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of the pachinko gaming machine) when the predetermined increase condition (every 300 game consumption per 100 rotation consumption) is satisfied. Player value increasing means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of pachinko gaming machine) for increasing the player value (points) set by. According to this feature, even if the player value is consumed, it is possible to increase the player value by establishing a predetermined increase condition thereafter, and to receive the award under the preferential condition again. Become.

  (3) The gaming machine according to (1) is characterized in that the predetermined increase condition is that the game history satisfies a specific condition (every 300 game digestion / 100 revolutions). According to this feature, the player's worth increases by playing a game, so the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

  (4) Does the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) consume the player value (points) set by the player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / effect control CPU 1101)? The player is provided with selection means (effect switch 56) for selecting whether or not the bonus giving means (sub control unit 91 / effect control CPU for pachinko gaming machine) is selected means (effect switch 56 / pachinko gaming machine) When it is selected that the player value (point) is consumed by the operation unit (e.g., the push button etc.), a benefit (coin) is given under the preferential conditions. According to this feature, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to consume the player value in order to apply the preferential conditions when the player receives the benefit.

  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) is a residual player value identification information (a two-dimensional code in which the points are identified) capable of identifying the remainder of the player value (points) at the end of the game. ) And outputting the remaining player value specifying information output unit (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of pachinko gaming machine). According to this feature, it is possible to consume one player's value across a plurality of gaming machines and apply the conditions favored when receiving the award of benefits.

  (6) The gaming system is a gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) capable of performing a predetermined game, and player information input means for inputting player information (password) related to the player (Operation switch 56, stop switch 8L, 8C, operation unit such as push button and stick controller of 8R / pachinko gaming machine), player information input means (display switch 56, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R / pachinko Player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine) for setting a player value (point) according to player information (password) input by an operation unit such as a push button or stick controller of a gaming machine Effect control CPU) and the game history (the result of every Privilege privilege granting means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of pachinko gaming machine) which grants privilege right (right to receive provision of coin) for receiving grant of privilege (coin) on the basis of The privilege right specifying information (the right to receive the coin is specified) which can specify the privilege right (the right to receive the coin) granted by the right giving means (the sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of the pachinko gaming machine) Gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) including privilege right identifying information output means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of pachinko gaming machine) for outputting two-dimensional code Two-dimensional specifying the privilege right specifying information (right to receive the coin) specified by the output means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of pachinko gaming machine) B) privilege granting means for granting a privilege (coin) based on the privilege right (right to receive coin) specified by The control CPU consumes the player value (points) by consuming the player values (points) set by the player value setting means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of the pachinko gaming machine) It is characterized by granting a privilege right (right to receive a coin) under conditions that are more preferential than in the case of not doing it.

  According to this feature, when the player value set in accordance with the player information input by the player information input means is consumed, it is more advantageous than the case where the player value (point) is not consumed. It is possible to receive the grant of the privilege right to receive the award of the privilege under the conditions described above. That is, since the degree of preferential treatment at the time of giving the privilege right changes depending on the presence or absence of the player value, it is possible to effectively enhance the interest when receiving the giving of the privilege right.

  The player information related to the player may be information that can specify the player, information such as a game history which is the result of the player having played a game in the past, and the player may It may be information etc. that can identify the value assigned to it.

  In addition, when the privilege right giving means consumes the player value, giving the privilege right on a condition more preferential than the case where the player value is not consumed does not consume the player value It may be that which grants the privilege right with a higher probability than in the case, or which grants a privilege right (such as a privilege right to obtain a high value privilege) having a higher value than the case where the player value is not consumed. It is also possible that a high-value benefit right is highly likely to be granted, or a combination of these in favor.

  Further, the privilege right specifying information output unit may be configured to output the privilege right specifying information by displaying character data, or by displaying data encoded like a bar code or a two-dimensional code, The privilege right specifying information may be output, or the privilege right specifying information may be output by outputting the privilege right specifying information in a readable manner from the outside through a wired connection, a wireless connection, an infrared connection, or the like.

  (7) In the gaming system according to (6), in the gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine), the player value setting is performed when a predetermined increase condition (every 300 games and every 100 rotations) is satisfied. Player value increasing means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of the pachinko gaming machine) for increasing the player value (points) set by the means (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of the pachinko gaming machine) It is characterized by having. According to this feature, even if the player's value has been consumed, the player's value can be increased by establishing a predetermined increase condition thereafter, and it is possible to receive the award of the privilege right under the preferential condition again. It becomes.

  (8) The gaming system according to (6) is characterized in that the predetermined increase condition is that the game history satisfies a specific condition (100 rotation digestion / 300 game digestion). According to this feature, since the player value (points) is increased by playing a game, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

  (9) In the gaming system according to any one of (6) to (8), the gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) is a player value setting unit (sub control unit 91 / presentation control of the pachinko gaming machine) For the privilege right giving means (sub control unit 91 / pachinko gaming machine), including selection means (effect switch 56) for the player to select whether or not to consume the player value (points) set by the CPU). The effect control CPU), when it is selected that the player value (points) is consumed by the selection means (effect switch 56 / push button 1120), the privilege right (coin grant) is given under the preferential conditions. It is characterized by granting the right to According to this feature, the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to consume the player value in order to apply the preferential conditions when the player receives the benefit.

  (10) In the gaming system according to any one of (6) to (9), the gaming machine (slot machine 1 / pachinko gaming machine) is a residual game that can specify the remaining player value (points) at the end of the game. Game device (management server 1200) including a residual player value identification information output unit (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of pachinko gaming machine) for outputting the player value identification information (two-dimensional code for identifying points); ) Includes player information issuing means for issuing player information (password) based on the player value (points) specified from the remaining player value specifying information (two-dimensional code for specifying points). It is characterized. According to this feature, it is possible to consume one player value across a plurality of gaming machines and apply the conditions favored when receiving the award of the privilege right.

  (11) In the gaming system according to any one of (6) to (10), the privilege right specifying information output unit (sub control unit 91 / CPU for effect control of pachinko gaming machine) is a privilege right as privilege right specifying information The two-dimensional code (two-dimensional code in which the right to receive the coin is specified) which can specify (right to receive the coin) is output, and the privilege giving means has a right to receive the two-dimensional code (coin It is characterized in that a privilege (coin) is given based on the privilege right (right to receive a coin) specified by reading the specified two-dimensional code. According to this feature, the player can receive the award of the privilege only by reading the two-dimensional code as the privilege right specifying information.

  Specifically, the gaming machine of (1) to (5) and the gaming system of (6) to (11) can be implemented as follows.

  The sub control unit 91 selects one of gold, silver, and copper when giving a coin at the time of bonus winning or cherry winning, but the number of points in the point storage area remains In this case, a guide to the effect that the selection rate of coins is favored by using points and a choice of 0 to 3 as consumption points are displayed. In this case, the effect switch 56 and the stop switch 8L , 8C, and 8R to select one of 1 to 3 points, the number of points selected is subtracted from the number of points in the point storage area, and the coin selection rate is preferential according to the selected number of points. It is supposed to be

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), when 0 points are selected (when points are not used), 10% of gold, 15% of silver, and 75% of copper are respectively elected If you choose 1 point, you win 20% gold, 20% silver and 60% copper, and if you select 2 points, you get 25% gold and 30% silver When copper is elected at a rate of 45% and 3 points are selected, it is elected with a probability of 30% for gold, 40% for silver, and 30% for copper.

  In this way, when coins are awarded, the selection rate of coins is favored in accordance with the number of points consumed, and the more points consumed, the better the color of the coin (copper → gold or Increase the probability of being given silver, silver → gold).

  Further, at the end of the game, the sub-control unit 91 will make a lottery for obtaining stock coins and determine whether or not stock coins can be obtained, but if the number of points in the point storage area remains, By using the points, a guide to the effect that the winning probability of the stock coin winning lottery is favored and choices of 0 to 3 as consumption points are displayed. At this time, the effect switch 56 and the stop switch 8L are displayed. , 8C, 8R to select one of 1 to 3 points, thereby subtracting the number of points selected from the number of points in the point storage area, and winning the stock coin winning lottery according to the selected number of points The probability is to be favored.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when 0 point is selected (when the point is not used), when the difference sheet number is minus 0.75%, the difference sheet number is plus In the case of winning by 0.5% respectively, when 1 point is selected, 3% is won if the difference number is minus, and 2% if the difference number is plus, and 2 points are selected. If the difference is negative, 7.5% is won, if the difference is positive 5%, and if 3 points are selected, the difference is negative. Wins 15% and 10% if the difference is positive.

  As described above, when the stock coin winning lottery is performed, the winning probability is preferential according to the number of points consumed, and the winning probability becomes higher as the number of points consumed is larger.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined that the information useful to the player consumes more points, and even if the number of remaining points is the same, useful information can be obtained according to the value of the information. The number of times will be different.

  The sub control unit 91 adds the number of points stored in the point storage area by the number according to the satisfied condition when the predetermined recovery condition is satisfied. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, after entering a password, the number of points in the point storage area is incremented by one every 300 games after being digested, and a rare effect (in the present embodiment, an effect with an appearance rate of 1/2000 or less) Each time the) is executed, the number of points in the point storage area is incremented by two. In addition, points may be added not only to the gaming machine side but also to the management server 1200. In this embodiment, the number of points managed by the management server 1200 is three additions every time the date is changed. It will be done.

  (1) As described above, in each of the above embodiments, an information output unit capable of outputting specific information encoded to include predetermined information (for example, a portion that performs the processing of S2207 in FIG. 24) And detection means (for example, a portion that performs the process of S2204 in FIG. 24) that detects whether or not the object (for example, the portable terminal 1100) is in a specific area (for example, in front of the liquid crystal display 51). The information output unit outputs the specific information on condition that the detection object is detected by the detection unit when the information output condition (for example, the input of the password) for permitting the output of the specific information is satisfied. (For example, when it is determined “YES” in the determination process of S2204 of FIG. 24, the process of S2207 is performed to enable the process of S2707 of FIG. 30). Therefore, the annoyance felt by the player when outputting the specific information can be eliminated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main menu screen is displayed when the portable terminal 1100 is detected. However, for example, the above game machine may output the two-dimensional code directly when the detection target is detected. By applying the configuration shown in the embodiment of the invention, the invention according to the claims can be realized.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main menu screen has been exemplified as the specific information. However, for example, the above embodiment is applied to a gaming machine that displays specific information different from the above embodiments, such as a two-dimensional code or a barcode. It is possible to realize the claimed invention by applying the configuration shown in the form of.

  In each of the above embodiments, the portable terminal 1100 is described as an example of the detection object, but for example, a detection object which is different from the above embodiment, such as a part of the player's body such as the player's hand. The invention described in the claims can be realized by applying the configuration described in the above embodiment to a gaming machine to be detected.

  In each of the above embodiments, the input of the password is taken as an example of the information output condition. For example, it is between the end of the game and the bet number setting, being in a bonus, being in a big hit, etc. The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration shown in the above-described embodiment to a game machine in which the information output condition different from the above-described embodiment is set.

  In each of the above embodiments, the specific area is located in front of the liquid crystal display 51 and at a position where the light receiving element 57b can receive the reflected light from the portable terminal 1100, and a position where the two-dimensional code can be acquired by the portable terminal 1100. In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine has a specific area different from the above embodiment, such as setting a specific area obliquely downward or obliquely upward of the liquid crystal display 51, for example. By applying the configuration, the invention according to claim 1 can be realized.

  In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the portable terminal 1100 is detected by the photoelectric sensor 57 has been described. However, for example, the above embodiment is applied to a gaming machine using a sensor different from the above embodiments, such as an infrared sensor or a magnetic sensor. It is possible to realize the claimed invention by applying the configuration shown in the form of.

  (2) Moreover, in each said embodiment, an information output means outputs specific information to the area | region decided beforehand (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display 51), and the specific area is specific information by an information output means. (For example, in front of the liquid crystal display 51 and at a position where the light receiving element 57b can receive reflected light from the portable terminal 1100), the portable terminal 1100 can further acquire a two-dimensional code position). Therefore, since the specific information is output only by performing the operation for acquiring the specific information at a position close to the predetermined area, the annoyance felt by the player when the specific information is output can be eliminated. .

  (3) Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the detection means detects the action of the player when the information output condition is not established, and performs special effect execution means (special effect execution means according to the detection result) For example, in the case where it is determined “NO” in the process of S4103 of FIG. 32, the section for performing the process of S4104 of FIG. 32 is provided. According to such a configuration, since the detection for executing the special effect and the detection for outputting the specific information can be used together, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, the execution of the special effects can enhance the interest of the effects. Furthermore, the annoyance felt by the player when outputting the specific information can be eliminated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the photoelectric sensor 57 is disposed in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display 51. However, for example, the photoelectric sensor 57 is disposed in the vicinity of the see-through window 3 of the front door 1b. 57 may be arranged to detect the action of the player.

  (4) Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the detection means may include notification means (for example, a portion that performs the process of S2206 in FIG. 24) for notifying that the object has been detected. According to such a configuration, the player can confirm that the specific information has been output, so that the specific information can be reliably acquired.

  In each of the above embodiments, an example in which notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 are disposed on the back side (inner side) of the reels. Back lamp (reel LED 55 of the above embodiment), a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured to make the reel visible) disposed on the front side of the reel, a lamp attached to the front door 1b, etc. The configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine that performs notification by means different from the above embodiment, such as LED, vibration of the stop switch, air blowing from around the stop switch, and change in temperature of the stop switch. It is then possible to implement the claimed invention. In addition, notification may be performed using a part of a device having another function (for example, when performing notification using a reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 has a function of illuminating the reel from the back side), You may provide the apparatus which only alert | reports.

  (5) Further, in each of the above embodiments, the detection means specifies the type of the object (for example, the part performing the process of S2205 in FIG. 24), and the information output means has the specific type of the detection object In the case where it is determined that the specific information is output (for example, when it is determined “YES” in the determination processing of S2205 of FIG. 24, the processing of S2207 is performed to enable the processing of S2707 of FIG. 30) . According to such a configuration, it can be reliably recognized whether or not the specific information should be output.

  In each of the above embodiments, the type of the object is specified by the amount of light reflected by the light receiving element 57b of the photoelectric sensor 57. For example, the illuminance of the reflected light received by the illuminance sensor or the image photographed by the camera The invention according to the claims is realized by applying the configuration described in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that detects the object by a method different from the above embodiment, such as specifying the type of the object by analyzing the It is possible.

  (6) Further, in each of the above embodiments, the right giving means for giving a right (for example, coin) for giving one of a plurality of types of benefits (for example, item A or item B) according to the game history. (For example, the portion performing the processing of S2604 to S2607 of FIG. 28 and performing the processing of S2611) and the privilege determination means for determining the privilege to be granted based on the right granted by the rights granting means (for example, S3703 of FIG. 47) And the step of performing the processing of S3710 by performing the determination processing of S3713), and when the special effect to be set by the player is set as the effect to be executed by the gaming machine, the benefit determination means performs the specific effect It is determined that a higher percentage of types of benefits related to the specific effect is given as a benefit as compared with the case where no is set (for example, FIG. 47) A judgment process of S 3704, the portion for processing S3709 performs processing of S3708). Therefore, since it is easy to be granted the kind of privilege related to the set specific effect, it is possible to grant the privilege which the player likes, and to make the player feel pleasure in the privilege giving. In addition, since it is possible to set the specific effect and increase the motivation to play the game, the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, an item has been exemplified as a benefit, but, for example, execution of setting suggestion effects, increase of effect types, transition to a state in which premium effects are likely to appear, wallpaper and music of mobile terminals It is possible to realize the claimed invention by applying the configuration shown in the above-described embodiment to a slot machine in which an advantageous right different from the above-described embodiment is set, such as the provision of.

  In each of the above embodiments, item A or item B is given as an example of a benefit, but for example, when character A is set as a specific effect, voice or wallpaper of character A with a portable terminal, character B When set as a specific effect, the voice or wallpaper on the mobile terminal for the character B is set as a privilege, etc. A plurality of types of benefits are set in the set category with the specific effect as a category, and the invention according to the claim is made. It is possible to realize.

  (7) Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the right giving means (for example, FIG. 28) for giving the right to give any of a plurality of types of benefits (for example, item A or item B) according to the game history. S2604 to S2607 and the part performing the process of S2611) and the benefit determination means for determining the benefit to be granted based on the right granted by the rights granting means (for example, the determination process of S3703 or S3713 in FIG. 47) Section to perform the processing of S3710) and privilege type selection means (for example, the section to perform the processing of S3706 and S3715 in FIG. 47) for the player to arbitrarily select the type of the desired benefit. The benefit determination means is selected by the benefit type selection means when the frequency of games is higher than a predetermined frequency, compared to when the frequency of games is not higher than the predetermined frequency. Player decides to grant the kind of benefits that is selected in a high percentage (e.g., a determination process in S3705 in FIG. 47, the portion for processing S3709 performs processing of S3708). Therefore, since the privilege favored by the player is given according to the frequency of the game, the player can be motivated to play the game, and the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, an item is taken as an example as a benefit, but, for example, execution of setting suggestion effects, increase of effect types, transition to a state in which premium effects are likely to occur, wallpaper or music of portable terminals The invention according to the claims can be realized by applying the configuration described in the above-described embodiment to a slot machine in which advantageous rights different from the above-described embodiment, such as giving, are set.

  In each of the above embodiments, item A or item B is given as an example of a benefit, but for example, when character A is set as a specific effect, voice or wallpaper of character A with a portable terminal, character B When set as a specific effect, the voice or wallpaper on the mobile terminal for the character B is set as a privilege, etc. A plurality of types of benefits are set in the set category with the specific effect as a category, and the invention according to the claim is made. It is possible to realize.

(8) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first right (for example, silver coin or copper coin) and the right of the type related to the specific effect set by the player are given as the right to give the benefit. The second right (for example, a coin) having a high rate is set, and a notification means (for example, a portion that performs the process of S2613 in FIG. 29) for notifying that the second right is obtained is provided.
Therefore, since the player can identify that the privilege that he / she likes is given, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play the game again and to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

  In each of the above embodiments, an example in which notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 are disposed on the back side (inner side) of the reels. Back lamp (reel LED 55 of the above embodiment), a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured to make the reel visible) disposed on the front side of the reel, a lamp attached to the front door 1b, etc. The configuration described in the above embodiment is applied to a slot machine that performs notification by means different from the above embodiment, such as LED, vibration of the stop switch, air blowing from around the stop switch, and change in temperature of the stop switch. It is then possible to implement the claimed invention. In addition, notification may be performed using a part of a device having another function (for example, when performing notification using a reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 has a function of illuminating the reel from the back side), You may provide the apparatus which only alert | reports.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, the first right (for example, silver coin or copper coin) and the right of the type set by the player are desired to be granted as the right to grant the privilege. A second right (for example, a gold coin) having a high rate of grant is set, and notification means (for example, a portion that performs the process of S2613 in FIG. 29) for notifying that the second right has been obtained is provided.
Therefore, since the player can identify that the privilege that he / she likes is given, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play the game again and to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

  In each of the above embodiments, an example in which notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 are disposed on the back side (inner side) of the reels. Back lamp (reel LED 55 of the above embodiment), a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured to make the reel visible) disposed on the front side of the reel, a lamp attached to the front door 1b, etc. The invention according to the claims is realized by applying a configuration in which notification is performed by means different from the above embodiments, such as the LED, the vibration of the stop switch, the air blowing around the stop switch, and the change of the temperature of the stop switch. It is possible. In addition, notification may be performed using a part of a device having another function (for example, when performing notification using a reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 has a function of illuminating the reel from the back side), You may provide the apparatus which only alert | reports.

  (10) Further, each of the above embodiments includes condition changing means (for example, a portion that performs the process of S3707 in FIG. 47) that changes the conditions for providing a benefit according to the game history. Thus, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the number of games increases and reaches 5000 games, an example is given in which the probability of obtaining the benefit associated with the set effect or the set desired benefit is reduced. The invention according to the claim is applied to a configuration that makes it easier to obtain benefits as the gaming history is accumulated, such as increasing the probability that the benefits related to the set effects and the desired benefits set can be obtained as the number increases. It is possible to realize

  In each of the above embodiments, the slot machine for setting the number of bets using medals and credits has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a game used in pachinko gaming machines The invention according to the claims is applied to a slot machine for setting the number of bets using balls, and a completely credited slot machine for setting the number of bets using only credits, by applying the configuration described in the above embodiment. It is possible to realize When using game balls as game media, for example, when one medal is made to correspond to five game balls, when setting 3 as the number of bets in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. It corresponds to what sets a bet number using.

  Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to one using only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, but, for example, a plurality of types of medals and game balls etc. The game value may be used in combination. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and by the occurrence of a prize, a plurality of types of gaming such as medals and gaming balls A slot machine capable of paying out any value is also included in the gaming machine of the present invention.

  1 slot machine, 1a housing, 1b front door, 2 reel units, 2L, 2C, 2R reels, 3 perspective windows, 4 medal insertion sections, 6 MAX BET switches, 7 start switches, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switches, 9 medals Payout, 10 settlement switch, 11 credit indicator, 12 gaming auxiliary indicator, 13 gaming display unit, 14 to 16 1 to 3 BET LED, 17 insertion request LED, 18 start effective LED, 19 weight LED, 20 replay LED , 21 BET switch valid LED, 22L, 22C, 22R stop valid LED, 23 reset switch, 24 set value indicator, 25 door open detection switch, 30 channel switching solenoid, 31 throw medal sensor, 32L, 32C, 32R reel motor , 33L, 33C 33R reel sensor, 34 hopper unit, 34a hopper tank, 34b hopper motor, 34c payout sensor, 35 overflow tank, 35a full tank sensor, 36a stop switch, 36b automatic settlement switch, 37 setting key switch, 38 reset / setting switch, 39 Power switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a main CPU, 41b, 91b, 755 RAM, 41c, 91c, 754 ROM, 41d, 91d I / O, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 44, 96 Switch detection circuit, 45 motor drive circuit, 46 solenoid drive circuit, 47, 93 LED drive circuit, 48, 98 power failure detection circuit, 49, 95 reset circuit, 51 liquid crystal display, 51a, 51b specific effect area 52 effect effect LED, 53, 54, 727R, 727L speaker, 55 reel LED, 56 effect switch, 90, 780 effect control board, 91 sub control unit, 91a sub CPU, 92 display control circuit, 94 audio output circuit, 97 Clock device, 100 power supply box, 101 power supply substrate, 110, 210 control unit, 120, 220 storage unit, 130, 230 operation unit, 140, 240 display unit, 150 wireless communication unit, 151 antenna, 160 camera unit, 250 communication unit , 700 Pachinko game machine, 702 glass door frame, 703 hitting ball supply tray, 704 surplus ball saucer, 705 ball hitting operation handle, 706 game board, 707 game area, 708a 1st special symbol indicator, 708b 2nd special symbol indicator, 709 effect display device, 710 normal symbol display, 711 general winning opening switch, 712 recovery passage sensor, 713 first starting winning opening, 713a first starting opening switch, 714 second starting winning opening, 714a second starting opening switch, 715 variable winning ball device, 716, 721 solenoid, 718a 1st special symbol holding memory indicator, 718b 2nd special symbol holding memory indicator, 718c 1st holding memory display unit, 718d 2nd holding memory display unit, 720 special variable winning ball device, 723 count switch, 725 decoration LED , 726 Out port, 728a sky frame LED, 728 b left frame LED, 728 c right frame LED, 731 main board, 732 gate, 732 a gate switch, 735 lamp driver board, 737 payout control board, 741 normal pattern storage memory indicator, 751 Award ball LED, 752 out of ball LE , 756 CPU, 757 I / O, 758 input driver circuit, 759 output circuit, 770 audio output board, 777 relay board, 797 ball dispenser, 900 Internet network, 1000 external output board, 1001 gaming system, 1100 portable terminal, 1200 Management server, 7111 chance button, 7112A, 7112B select button, 7503 random number circuit, 7560 Microcomputer for game control.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player,
Holding storage means capable of storing information on a variable display not yet started as holding storage;
A variable winning device capable of changing to a first state in which game media does not easily enter or does not enter, and a second state in which game media is easier to enter than the first state;
A predetermined effect execution unit that executes a predetermined effect of notifying a first result indicating whether the variable winning device is in the second state or a second result indicating the possibility of the advantageous state;
And predetermined effect limiting means for restricting execution of the predetermined effect during a predetermined period when variable display is not performed,
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a first effect mode and a second effect mode,
The ratio of which one of the first result and the second result is notified between when the predetermined effect is executed by the first effect mode and when it is executed by the second effect mode is No,
The hold stored in the hold storage means than when the predetermined effect of notifying the second result is performed when the number of the hold memories stored in the hold storage means is a first number The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined effect of notifying the second result is performed when the number of memories is a second number that is larger than the first number.
A game machine characterized by